Tumgik
#kun angst
writemekpop · 8 months
Text
Get Lucky | Qian Kun
Summary: When things start to get sexy with your new date Kun, he gets scared.
Genre: Drunk!Kun, fluff
Word Count: 0.6k
Tumblr media
“You know… I’m a teeny-weeny bit DRUNK,” Kun whispered, pressing his palms to his cheeks.
You looked at Kun’s glazed-over hazel eyes, his cheeky grin, the way his normally perfect hair was in disarray.
“No shit, Sherlock,” you said, laughing.
Kun leant down and captured his pink curly straw between his lips. He sucked long and slow on his pina colada, his eyes never leaving yours.
The way he looked at you made your entire spine tingle.
You fanned yourself. “Is it just me, or is it getting hot in here? What do you say we take this somewhere else… like my place?”
Kun stared deep into your eyes. He reached his hand forwards, and tentatively, touched your thigh.
You could have moaned in pleasure. This was your third date, and you’d only pecked him on the lips once. You were dying for more.
He smiled bashfully. “I have to admit, the thoughts I am having right now are not very... gentlemanly.”
You leaned towards him, smirking. “Good thing I don’t want a gentleman.”
Kun touched the hem of your skirt. He couldn’t meet your eyes.
“What do you say we…” he mumbled. But then a Rihanna song started playing, and the other people in the bar cheered so loud it drowned his voice out.
“What did you say?” You shouted over the thumping bass. “I can’t hear you!”
Kun looked around, as if contemplating whether to repeat himself. Then, he shook his head and stood up.
He pulled on his jacket. “I just remembered… I’ve got a very important meeting in the morning. I’ve got to go!” 
You frowned. “But tomorrow’s Sunday! Wait!”
But it was too late, because Kun had disappeared.
--
You stumbled into your apartment, alone, and even more drunk.
Your kitten, Baghira, mewled.
You knelt down and stroked her black fur.
“It’s just like my mum,” You sniffed. “Why does everybody leave me?”
Just then, you heard a knock on your door.
You pulled the door open and saw Kun. He looked handsome, with his deep dimples and plump lips. His face was tinged a deep red.
“Kun? What are you doing here?” Your heart started to pound.
Kun straightened himself up, brushing the dust from his jacket.
“Y/n, I’m sorry for running away like that. It was rude. I do want to be with you, it’s just… it’s just.” He sighed.  
Kun pulled his hand out from behind his back and gave you a bar of Twix. You looked at him quizzically.
He pouted. “I wanted to get you flowers, but the only thing open this late was the vending machine.”
You giggled, swooning internally. Then you remembered how he’d ditched you, and the feeling vanished.
“I really am sorry,” Kun said, tugging a hand through his deep black hair. “I left because… everything was happening so fast. I want us to be more than some random hook-up.” He met your eyes. “When I make love to you, I want to do it right. I want it to mean something.”
You nodded. “If we’re gonna sleep together, let’s do it properly. Girlfriend and boyfriend.”
Kun grinned. “So… can I come in?”
“I’ll give you one last chance – but only coz you’re hot,” you said, shaking your head. You stepped to the side to allow him in.
Kun walked in and pulled you towards him. He kissed your lips softly. “I promise you won’t regret this,” he whispered.
Your heart thumped. “I know I won’t.”
MAIN MASTERLIST
Let us know what you thought in the comments or on anon! 💋
340 notes · View notes
xofanfics · 5 months
Text
Lost for Words - Part I
Tumblr media
Part I | Part II | Part III
Genre: angst, fluff, smut 🥺🤗🥵
Pairing: Reader x Kun // Reader x Taeyong
Word Count: 6k
Summary: You have the best boyfriend you could’ve asked for. Things take an interesting turn as you befriend your new coworker, exploring the blurred lines between friendship and something more.
Kun was the first man that came into your life that cared enough to try to learn your love language. For that, you were forever grateful. He bought you flowers, just because. He admitted that he never bought a girl flowers for no reason. Before he met you, he thought things like flowers and chocolates were meant only for Valentine’s Day and birthdays. But he bought them for you on the first Valentine’s Day you spent together. He could see the glimmer in your eyes as you admired them and, because of that, he bought them for you when he felt like you needed it. So, he bought them for you when you were feeling stressed, before a Friday night date, and sent them to your office for no reason at all. 
He’d do things like cook you dinner when you didn’t ask. He paid attention to the things you said, like if you were craving Chinese dishes. The next day, he’d been in the kitchen making your favorite noodle dish. And you’d smile wide, the sparkle in your eyes enough to light up the darkest of his days. He’d do small things to make your life easier, like run the water for your bath while you worked late or steam your clothes in the morning if you forgot the night before.  
Kun liked to cater to you, perhaps more than you did for him. Despite that, he never complained about it and he assured you that it was fine when you asked about it. He’d said, “I do these things because I want to, because I love you.” Kun’s love languages were different from yours, you realized. He preferred quality time and physical touch, so as long as he at least had those things, he was happy. In contrast, you preferred acts of service but, like him, you also enjoyed quality time.
You were looking at your sleeping boyfriend with a smile. Your leg was wrapped around his and he had his arms wrapped around you. The two of you often slept like this, with your limbs entangled around each other until it got too hot in the middle of the night. You’d roll over on your side and he’d follow so that he could spoon you from behind. And sometimes, he’d be hard and it would turn you on. And then turning over in bed would lead to you getting under him, wrapping your legs around him as he gave you what you wanted. You smiled at the thought, not because you were horny but because the love you had was so beautiful, so pure. As you watched him sleep, you realized how lucky you were to have found a man like Kun Qian. 
You buried your face in his arm and he stirred. He groaned, glancing over at the clock on the nightstand. “Why are you awake so early, baby? Let’s go back to sleep.” 
“I can’t believe we have to leave each other in a couple hours… The weekend goes by too fast.”
“I know,” he said, “The weekend isn’t enough.”
“I can’t wait to move in together,” you said, smiling at the thought. 
He pulled you closer and kissed you on your forehead. “Waking up to your face everyday would make me so happy.”
“I know,” you said, melting in his embrace.
You couldn’t imagine being with anyone except Kun. And being with him, you hit so many milestones already. You’d been together for two years now and you were ready to take the next step—moving in together. Soon, you wouldn’t have to alternate weekends, going from his apartment to yours. Soon, you’d be falling asleep and waking up together, making meals together, and heading out for work together everyday. And even if he had a business trip, you’d be at home to greet him upon his return. Still, this was a few months down the road, given that spring was in the air and summer was on its way. The decision was set for this winter.
It was perfect. Everything was perfect. He was perfect—a match made in heaven. But sometimes you wondered if things were too good to be true. Sometimes, you felt insecure. But you knew that it was your fear of abandonment speaking and that was something you had to overcome. Kun was a good man and you had no reason to think he would suddenly leave you. Always, he reassured you that you were perfect for him and that there was no way he could live without you. Despite your random feelings of doubt and worry, Kun held your heart in his hands and held it tightly. They say that actions speak louder than words and he’d proven to you, time and time again, that he had no intentions of letting you go so easily—not if he could help it. 
He told you that he would marry you someday. And despite what you may have thought, he had no intention of going back on those words. 
*
You sighed as you walked into your office that day. Staying in bed with your boyfriend would’ve been the better of the two options. The aroma of the cheap coffee the office manager ordered every week filled your nostrils, as you walked past the kitchen. In passing, you exchanged greetings with a couple of coworkers who were deeply immersed in a conversation that seemed to revolve around the latest celebrity scandal.
You placed your vanilla macchiato on your desk before you started setting up your desk for a long work day. Your coworker and friend, Hina, who seemed to have just come from the bathroom, greeted you as you sat down. “Morning, Y/N!”
You raised an eyebrow. In general, Hina was a pretty energetic person, but she seemed extra hyped up this morning. “Morning,” you replied. “Why do— no—how do you have so much energy on a Monday morning?”
“I’m excited because the new hire starts today. I dunno about you but I can’t take another second of trying to figure out how our campaigns are performing,” she complained. “I know there are a couple positions being filled but Chaerin could’ve at least left after one of them was filled.”  She rolled her eyes and slammed her notebook closed. 
“I would leave in a second if I got the offer she did. She’s making well over six figures now, can you believe it?”
She sighed. “I mean I get it but if someone asks me one more question I can’t answer,, I’m actually going to kill myself. I shouldn’t have said that I was eager to learn in the interview.”
“There’s been so much going on, I guess I forgot about someone new coming on.”
“He should be getting here soon.”
“He?”
“Yeah. The HR lady had his new hire paperwork on the desk when I went in there a few minutes ago looking for her.”
“So nosy,” you said, shaking your head before taking a sip of your coffee. 
You looked up as you heard the light murmur of chatter coming toward your side of the office. You saw the HR Manager walking into her office with a handsome man walking behind her, looking around the office with big, curious eyes that darted from left to right. 
“He’s good looking,” said Hina, nudging you with a wink.
You chuckled. “I thought Kevin was your office crush?”
“Hey, I can have two office crushes!”
A half hour passed and as you were getting into the groove of your workday, the Creative Director, David, walked over toward your desks with Taeyong behind him. “Meet Taeyong,” he said. “He’s our new analyst. He’s going to be trained by Valentina once she’s back from maternity leave in a couple weeks. Of course, we will all be working together closely as we use analytics to inform our decisions for our upcoming campaigns.”
You stood up, shaking his hand, after he greeted Hina. “Hi, I’m Y/N. I’m one of the marketing managers. If you need help with anything or have any questions, you can ask me. I know things can be a little overwhelming on the first day but if Valentina picked you while on maternity leave, I already know you’re the best of the best!”
“Nice to meet you,” he said, smiling brightly. “And thank you so much. I look forward to working with everyone.”
At that, David cleared his throat. “I have a meeting with a partner in a few minutes but, Y/N, could you get him set up and show him around the office? Hina, could you come with me? I want you to join this one, since you had some ideas from our brainstorm last week.”
“Um, sure,” you said, as your coworkers walked away from you, leaving you and Taeyong behind.  You walked ahead, to the next row of desks across the aisle. “So this is going to be your desk while you’re here. You actually have a nice view on this side of the office.” You turned the monitor on to check if it was functional and checked that he had all of the cords he needed to set up. 
Taeyong let out a lighthearted chuckle as he placed the laptop he’d been carrying on the desk. “I just can’t believe I have the newest MacBook. My last work computer was so slow and it would overheat anytime I opened Chrome.”
You laughed. “Sounds like a pain in the ass.” 
“Definitely…”
“Did you go to school in Seoul?”
Taeyong shook his head. “No, I actually went to the University of Hong Kong. I ended up getting a scholarship.”
“Wow. That’s amazing. I wish I had the opportunity to study abroad. It seems like a great experience.”
“Yeah,” he said, “I’m definitely glad I left Korea for a while. It’s nice to experience new things, meet new people, you know, and get out of your comfort zone. Plus, I even learned a little Cantonese.”
You led Taeyong through the office, showing him where the product, sales, and tech teams all sat. You showed him the meeting rooms, some empty and others filled with two or three people getting their days started. You showed him the kitchen and how to use the coffee machine while you explained that there were bagels on Mondays and that you’d have half days on Fridays once summer commenced. 
Taeyong looked around the office with curious eyes, excited to be a part of this company. He’d been so excited to hear back from this company after three rounds of stressful interviews. He’d heard of people struggling to get a job in the current economy. So, he was grateful to be in a company that seemed to have some good perks. 
His last job treated him poorly. He’d spend hours, sometimes even outside working hours, working on reports. And then, the data wasn’t even used. He never received any recognition and barely received any feedback. The only feedback he ever got was when his work wasn’t what the higher ups wanted. If it was negative, he sure got feedback. But as for anything positive? There was rarely any feedback there. So, Taeyong gave his resume a much needed makeover and set his sights on a new job and a company that would at least value his work. 
He got good vibes from this place so far, especially from you. He thought about what it’d been like when he came here for his very first interview. Honestly speaking, he remembered seeing you. He saw you while he was waiting for the hiring manager. You’d been walking past the blue armchair he was sitting in. You were with the coworker he met today, Hina. He noticed you right away, mostly because you had this loud laughter. It wasn’t obnoxious but it was the kind of laughter that was contagious, the kind of laughter where you had no choice but to laugh, too. But he noticed how wide your smile was and how happy you seemed and how long it’d been since he’d seen a woman smile like that. 
You noticed him then, a worried expression plastered on your face. “Hi, are you here for an interview? Did someone help you already?”
“Yeah, they know I’m here. Thanks.” 
“Do you want water or anything to drink?” you offered. “I know interviews can be a little stressful.”
Taeyong shook his head. “Water would be nice. Thank you.” And a moment later, you returned with a cold water bottle for him, handing it to him with a smile. And then he aced his interview and ended up here, with you. 
He figured it was probably insignificant but he found that a lot of people in the working world could be so cold. But Taeyong was a person who cared a lot. He was someone who treated everyone with kindness, because that’s what he’d want in return. He was the kind of person who cared about the people he worked with. 
“Have you been working here long?” Taeyong asked, as you showed him into the main kitchen. He noticed that the kitchen was stocked with snacks and fresh fruit, as he recalled you mentioning that the office manager, placed an order every week. You added earlier that if he had any requests, for office supplies or for snacks in the pantry, to let them know. 
“Almost two years,” you replied. “I actually just got a promotion. I came up with this amazing concept for one of our new products. It wasn’t perfect but I worked with the product development team to figure it all out.”
“That’s really impressive,” he said. “I hope I can grow here, too.”
You nodded. “I’m sure you will…Between you and me, they took forever to fill this role. I feel like they were looking for the perfect person and, well, it looks like they found you.” 
Taeyong chuckled. “That’s great to know.”
The two of you stood at the coffee machine, deciding to get a fresh cup from the machine that seemed to have endless options; from lattes to macchiatos, it seemed like the machine could do it all. You were very friendly, he noticed, and he hoped that the others were just as nice as you were. 
*
Two weeks had gone by since Taeyong was brought on. In just two weeks, he’d gotten a lot done. Taeyong went from meeting to meeting, learning as much as he could about the company’s products. He took in your marketing plans, asking questions as he went. And soon enough he was churning out data reports based on your past campaigns.  So far, he seemed to be the type to go above and beyond and you appreciated that. His doing his job well helped everyone else do their jobs well, too.
It was Friday and it was nearly five o’clock. It’d been a long week, full of deadlines and you were relieved to have a couple of days to relax. As of now, you had absolutely nothing planned. Kun was going out to a friend’s birthday dinner, so you figured you’d stay home and make dinner while enjoying a cool glass of wine. 
As you made mental notes of the groceries you wanted to buy, you heard a slam from across the office. You’d been lost in your thoughts at that moment and you shrieked aloud. 
Hina looked up from her laptop with a grin. “You’re so dramatic!” she said, nudging you in the arm. You both chuckled. 
David stood up from his desk. “Please tell me that everyone is finished with their to do lists for today,” he asked, with a hopeful tone. 
Mostly, everyone nodded, except Kevin who huffed and said, “We need to have a meeting with the product team on Monday. I just saw that they rejected the new design for packaging. And at this point, we’re going to have to push back the launch again.” 
David sucked his teeth, turning back to her laptop screen. You knew his stress all too well. If his team’s work got rejected one too many times, all of our plans got pushed back. “What’s the issue now?” David chimed in, glaring across the room at the product team’s side of the office. “You know what? I don’t care. It can wait until Monday. I will send out a calendar invite. We can’t keep pushing these launches back like this…Anyway, I was thinking that we could go for a team dinner tonight if most of you are free? We haven’t officially welcomed Taeyong to the team since we’ve been so busy. My treat.”
The team clapped in response. Typically on Fridays David and Valentina didn’t make anyone work late, but very rarely did it come with either of them offering to pay for dinner. Within five minutes, all ten members of your team were packed and ready to go. 
“Where are we going?” asked Taeyong in a curious tone. 
“How about dim sum?” David suggested. “I’m in the mood for some dumplings and they have really good soup dumplings. Have you had those?”
Taeyong nodded. “I haven’t had any since I left Hong Kong.”
“Right, you went to school there. You’ll love these. The owners are from Hong Kong so it’s authentic and delicious.”
There were some murmurs of agreement and you and your team were whisked away, heading toward the elevators. 
Taeyong walked with you, Hina, and your other teammate, Michelle. Taeyong was the talkative type, from what you could see, and he held up most of the conversation. You wondered how he had so much energy. Maybe it was because it was Friday and you’d left the office to start the weekend. Maybe it was because he was new and excited about his new position. Maybe he just had a lot of energy, in general. It wasn’t that you hated your job but it was rare that you felt feelings like joy or excitement about coming into work. Taeyong was excited and you almost envied him for it. 
Your stomach grumbled as you went inside the restaurant and got a whiff of whatever was cooking in the kitchen as your group walked toward a large table in the back. Just as you were about to take a seat next to David, he waved Taeyong over. “Come sit here.” He made a hand motion at Hina, who had sat next to the seat he apparently wanted Taeyong in. “Scoot over one seat and let Y/N sit there so Taeyong can sit here.”
The three of you shuffled about until you were in your “assigned” seats. Hina whispered, “God, are we adults or are we in elementary school?” The two of you snickered together as the waiter placed a fresh pot of barley tea in the middle of the table. 
The group spent the next ten minutes figuring out what to order. Your boss ordered several orders of everything—dumplings and buns in just about every form, wine chicken, tofu dishes, bok choy, chicken feet, and probably more rice rolls than you needed. And of course, he ordered some liquor to get everyone started. That was always his strategy: get everyone at least tipsy so that the conversation would be more interesting, as he put it. 
The conversation was spread across the table, with your half of the table talking amongst yourselves and the other half doing the same. It wasn’t until the food came that your boss decided to be more interactive with Taeyong.
“How were these past two weeks? Are you adjusting well? I told everyone to take care of you so if they didn’t, you can tell me.”
Taeyong nodded. “It’s going well. I’m enjoying the work. And Y/N is really sweet. She helped me get settled easily.” He then turned to you directly. “Thanks for being so helpful and answering all my stupid questions. You’re really good at explaining! And you too, Hina. I’m learning a lot from both of you.”
You felt yourself blushing at the sudden compliment. Your work was something you were proud of but it was rare that someone openly appreciated the projects you’d worked on or your knowledge of the company products. Of course, Kun would always congratulate you when you told him about your accomplishments at work. But it felt good to hear it from someone at the company, especially from someone new to the team and someone who knew more about the things you were working on. You and Taeyong collaborated more than you thought you would initially. And the meetings you had with him were extremely helpful and even gave you some ideas for future projects. Taeyong seemed to be pretty creative and even contributed ideas that he wasn’t sure were even possible. But you liked that he seemed to believe that you could do anything with the right people and the right tools and resources. 
David’s lips parted in surprise. “Wow, Taeyong is showering everyone with compliments today. I feel a little left out.”
Taeyong laughed. “Of course, I like working with you all but I have to admit, I think Y/N and Hina are more my style.”
You felt heat rising to your cheeks at Taeyong’s seemingly flirty comment. It wasn’t that you had a crush on Taeyong, but you were interested in him as a person. You genuinely enjoyed spending time with him and working on projects together. You were a marketing manager and he was an analyst. The two of you made a good team…along with Hina of course. 
***
After food and a couple more drinks than you should’ve had, you were thoroughly stuffed. Your boss paid for the meal with the company credit card and scurried off saying that his wife was waiting for him at home. Then your coworkers began to disappear, one by one, until only you, Hina, and Taeyong were left. And Hina insisted on finishing the liquor your coworkers left behind in the pitcher. 
You said, “I must have gained like fifty pounds.”
“Let’s start walking so we can lose at least five,” Taeyong said, nudging you. 
“I should go on a diet,” you said, standing up from the chair, stretching.
“You don’t need a diet,” he said. “It always bothers me to hear women say that…”
Hina said, “So, your type is a woman who eats well, hm?”
Taeyong nodded with a smile. “Yeah. I love cooking so I want someone who can taste it first and tell me if it’s good or not.”
“Will you cook for the holiday potluck?”
Taeyong smirked. “Maybe.”
“I never had a man cook anything for me,” said Hina, frowning as she stood.
“But your dad cooks really well,” you said. “I still think about the clam soup he made for your birthday.”
“That doesn’t count,” she explained, as she slowly began to tip over into the chair. She held onto the table to hold herself up and rolled her eyes. “He’s my dad. I want a man to cook for me!”
Taeyong chuckled. “Does that mean you’re good at cooking? Do you take after your dad?”
Before she could answer, you opened your mouth to speak. “Let’s just say she could use a little work…”
Hina laughed. “Hey! I improved since last time!”
Taeyong patted her shoulder. “Let’s get you home.”
“I can go myself,” she said, doing her best to stand straight. Whether she realized it or not, she definitely couldn’t do it on her own. 
You said, “Don’t worry. I can take her home.”
Taeyong shook his head. “What kind of man would I be if I let you go by yourselves? I’ll call a taxi and the three of us can go.”
Hina said, “I’m perfectly fine to take the train!”
“Fine,” said Taeyong with a sigh, “we can take the train.”
***
Hina was the one who insisted on taking the train despite hardly being able to support herself on her own two feet. She stumbled into you and Taeyong as the three of you walked to the station and even fell asleep in her seat, her mouth wide open. 
“I’m sorry about Hina,” you said, as you arrived closer to her stop. “She’s one of those people where you don’t know how drunk she is until it’s too late.”
Taeyong smiled. “We all have that one friend.”
You’d been worried that Taeyong might be annoyed but, from what you could see, he seemed to have a lot of patience. 
“Well I’m sorry that you have to spend your Friday night with your drunk coworkers,” you said, chuckling. 
“It’s fine,” he said. “Really. I don’t mind at all. This is better than spending my Friday night by myself. I don’t have many friends in Seoul since I moved back. I got pretty close to a few people in Hong Kong but, you know, they’re in Hong Kong…” Taeyong continued. “My best friend from high school was an international student from Thailand so he’s back there. Lucky for me, he comes to Seoul pretty often for his work. And my other best friend is living in Incheon, so he’s close but he works in finance and he has a girlfriend now so he’s busy.”
“Wow, so most of your friends aren’t even in the country, huh?”
“Lucky me,” he said, with a sigh. 
“Well we’ll definitely be friends with you. Even though Hina fell asleep, she really likes you. She said that you’re way better than Chaerin.”
You laughed and Taeyong joined in with a laugh that seemed so light and free. You liked hearing him laugh. Taeyong could be quiet at times but he was playful, too. Hina liked him and you liked him, too. 
You and Taeyong helped Hina up and off of the train a moment later. Together, you brought Hina to her small apartment a couple blocks away from the station. As you got into the elevator, she said, “I ordered pizza.” 
“When did you order pizza?”
“When you went to get me water from the convenience store.”
In those couple of minutes you were inside the store, Hina apparently ordered pizza while in Taeyong’s care. You shot him a look, to which he said, “I didn’t see her do it. I just thought she was texting or something.”
You laughed. “Well hopefully she can stay up long enough to eat it…”
Hina put in the code to her door and you and Taeyong followed her inside. You said, “I’ll help her put her pajamas on. You don’t have to stay. You’ve helped us out a lot tonight. I really appreciate it.”
Taeyong said, “I’ll stay here at least until she gets settled. I should make sure you get home okay, too.”
“Okay,” you said, before you disappeared with Hina into the bedroom. Thankfully, Hina had had a little bit of time to sober up and she didn’t seem as wobbly before. You pulled out pajamas from her drawers that didn’t match and handed them to her. You turned while Hina got herself undressed.
“I can’t believe I’m this drunk,” she said. “I’m so embarrassed Taeyong saw me like this.”
“It’s fine,” you assured her. “You had a little too much but it’s not like you did anything embarrassing. If you jumped on top of the table and started dancing, that would be a different story.” The two of you laughed for a moment before you turned to her. “Wait, you ordered pizza, right?”
Hina said, “Oh! I almost forgot. The app says it’ll be here in ten minutes. I’m so tired though.” She walked over to her bed. “I don’t care about taking my makeup off or taking a shower right now. Actually, can you just stay here until the pizza comes? I’m just gonna take a little nap. Wake me up when it gets here.” She put her head on the pillow and closed her eyes. She fell asleep almost instantly and you knew that she would give you hell when you tried to wake her up in a few minutes to eat. 
You figured you should go to the bathroom before leaving. As you headed down the hall, you tripped over an unknown object, sending you crashing into the wall. As you collided with the wall, you knocked down a photo frame. It plummeted to the hardwood floor, crashing to the floor, the glass shattering. 
Before you could blink, Taeyong was by your side, eyes wide and full of concern as you’d also ended up on the floor. “Are you okay? Did you get cut anywhere?” He took your hand, examining it for cuts.  
“I think I’m okay,” you said, putting your palm on the floor to help you up. 
“Wait,” he said, putting his hand out before you could touch anything. “Let me clean up the glass. There could be some small pieces and I don’t want you to get hurt.”
You waited for him to get back with the broom and watched as he swept up every single piece you could see. 
“I guess I’ll buy her a new picture frame,” you said, chuckling. “What did I even trip over?” You turned to find one of Hina’s slippers in the middle of the floor. They must’ve come off as you brought her into the bedroom. 
Taeyong winced as he picked up the last piece, shaking his hand. “Damn it!”
Your heart dropped as you saw a tiny sliver of blood pour from his finger. You got up, despite his protests, and got Hina’s first aid kit from the medicine cabinet. You called him over to sit on the bathtub edge, next to you, and pulled out a bandage and alcohol wipe. 
He sat down and said, “I can do it, you know…”
“It’s fine,” you said, ripping the paper open on the alcohol wipe. You swiped at the blood coming from his cut, causing Taeyong to yelp from the sting. His reaction made you chuckle. He rolled his eyes as you put the bandage on, wrapping it carefully around his finger. “There.”
“Thanks,” he said, smiling at you. 
Your eyes met his. The air felt heavy for a few seconds. It felt almost as time stopped. There was this slight tension that you weren’t sure if he felt, too. The few seconds that you had locked eyes felt like hours. The doorbell rang, interrupting the seemingly intimate moment. 
“I’ll get it.”
*
As you predicted, Hina didn’t wake up in time for the pizza. When you attempted to wake her from her drunken state, you were met with protest and crankiness. Despite your best attempts, Hina refused to be pulled or prodded. So, you and Taeyong helped yourselves.
In the middle of your bite, you heard a loud vibrating sound. “Oh,” you said, “my phone!” You realized that you hadn’t paid your phone a single ounce of attention since you’d arrived. Your heart dropped as you realized that it was your boyfriend calling. 
You answered. “Hello?”
“Are you okay, babe?”
“Of course. I’m fine.”
“I was worried,” he said. “I was trying to stay awake until you came home but I fell asleep…Why didn’t you text me back?”
“I saw your message but I forgot about it. Hina got a little too drunk, then me and Taeyong helped me get her home…”
“Taeyong?”
“He’s new to the team. I told you, remember?”
“Right,” he said. “Anyway, are you still going to come here? Maybe you should go home instead. I could meet you there?”
“No, it’s okay. We have pizza so I’ll eat a little more and then come there.”
“Use my account and take a taxi, okay? I’ll wait for you.”
“Okay, I’ll see you later.”
“I love you, Y/N. Get here safely, okay?”
“Yeah,” you said, “I will.”
You pressed end and returned to your pizza. To be honest, you felt a little awkward having that conversation in front of Taeyong. 
“I didn’t know you had a boyfriend,” he said. “Have you been together long?”
“It’s been about two years,” you explained. “I guess I just don’t talk about him much.”
Taeyong nodded, taking his last bite of pizza. “We should get going,” he said. “Will Hina be okay?” 
“Yeah,” you said, “I put a bottle of water on her nightstand and the garbage can is by her bed if she needs to throw up.” You stood up. “I’m just going to go to the bathroom.”
While you went to the bathroom, Taeyong picked up the paper plates and cleared the counter. He put the pizza box in the fridge and then went to get your coat. By the time you came out, Taeyong had your coat and bag ready for you. 
“You ready to go?” he asked. 
***
Kun was awake when you arrived. He was sitting on the couch waiting for you, makeup remover and cotton balls ready. 
“Hey baby,” he said, a wide smile on his face. “Welcome back.”
“Hi,” you said, sitting next to him. You planted a kiss on his lips with a loud smack. “I’m not that drunk babe. I can take my makeup off.”
He chuckled in response. “A good boyfriend should always be prepared for his drunk girlfriend to come home. They’ll come back too drunk to take off their makeup, they’ll start demanding to order chicken nuggets or they’ll throw you on the bed for sex.”
“I’ve only done those things like once.”
“I mean, you definitely made me go to McDonalds and yelled at me because it was late and they only had breakfast. So, you asked for a McGriddle instead.” As you laughed and reached for the cotton balls, Kun stopped you. “I got it, babe.”
You shrugged and let your boyfriend remove your makeup. He was always so gentle with you; it was as if he thought you might break if he held you too tightly. In that moment, you realized how tired you were. And Kun knew that because he picked you up off of the couch, carrying you into the bedroom. He kissed you as he placed you onto the bed. Before you knew it, he was peeling off your clothes, kissing each spot where he removed something. 
You could feel yourself getting wetter and wetter with each kiss. When he finally took your panties off, you couldn’t take it anymore. You found yourself climbing on top of him, cupping his face with your hands around his face. You kissed him, pushing your tongue in his mouth. 
“What’s with you?” Kun asked, surprised by your forwardness, as he pulled away from you. 
“I just want you, babe,” you said, kissing his neck. 
“I want you, too,” he said, rolling you over onto your back. He swiped at your pussy, feeling how wet you’d gotten. He hummed in satisfaction. He pushed a finger inside, your wetness covering it. You gasped at the feeling, gripping around his finger. As he added another, you let out a moan. He fingered you for a few moments, driving you crazy. You needed him inside of you and you needed it now.
“Please,” you whined. 
At that, he pulled his fingers out. He got on top of you and you used your hands to guide him inside. He plunged deep into you, taking a moment to revel in the feeling. You pulled him closer, wrapping your arms and legs around him. Your lips parted in satisfaction as he began to pull and push himself in and out of you. Kun loved it when you were on your back and he could look deep into your eyes. 
You pulled him closer, bringing him into your neck. He kissed it so tenderly with each stroke, allowing a soft moan to come from your lips. He went slow for you, plunging seemingly deeper and deeper into you. 
Moments later, he wasn’t going easy on you anymore. He’d bent you over the bed and was pounding you hard, sending you into a frenzy of loud moans in which you were sure the neighbors could hear. And with one last stroke, he came undone with a heavy sigh. 
After, you and Kun laid down in bed. Naked bodies pressed against each other, Kun held you in his arms as you began to slowly drift to sleep. 
“I love you, Y/N,” he whispered before pressing his lips to your shoulder. You heard him but couldn’t bring yourself to speak back. It was just seconds before your world went dark.
***
General Taglist: @to-all-the-stories-i-love​ @sweetnspicy-noona​
LMK if you want to be tagged in the next part! - Part II coming soon!
96 notes · View notes
dr-qian · 4 months
Text
backburner // q.k
Tumblr media
kun x reader
"hey, i want that"
i told him while pointing at the lonely chips bag lying flat in the shelf on front of me.
it seems like people did not bother to buy it today, i don't know if it's because they don't like the flavor or it's just gonna expire soon.
either way, i'll take it home 'cause I pity it. like how i should be for myself.
"take it if you want it, i'll pay for it anyway" he mumbled the last part, and I chuckled.
and then suddenly i jumped on his back and wrapped my arms around his neck.
"you serious?" i asked as I squished my cheek onto his.
"get off me" he said while quietly laughing, pushing me off his back, conscious that the few customers there could see us like that.
so I granted his wish and hopped down. i'm still smiling.
"yeah, i'm serious, just take what you want..." he said while continuing to roam around the aisles.
and so i got what i want...
"how about you? are you going to get something?"
"i'm good with this" he lifted the coca-cola can in his right hand.
We walked towards the sleepy cashier near the exit, suddenly jolting up when he heard the sound of the can landing on the marbled counter.
then i started staring at his face while he fishes for his brown wallet in his jeans' pocket.
and i stared.
and i stared.
and i stared.
"hey, let's leave now" kun snapped his fingers on front me, stopping me from staring at him too much.
he's used to it. i'm used to it. so it doesn't really matter i guess...
he was about to lead me out of the store, carrying the paper bag, when suddenly raindrops started pouring.
"shit, let's just stay here for a while..." he told me, pushing me gently back inside the store.
i said nothing as I went back to looking at his face.
"you know, your staring won't change anything between us..." he finally looked at me, then looked out the glass window walls to see if the rain finally stops.
"i'm sorry i can't help it, it just gets worse everytime i'm with you..." i mumbled the last part.
suddenly, the floor is so pretty to look at.
i felt that he looked at me again, taking a long pause before saying the next brutal words for me.
"you know i'll never be in love with you, right?"
shit. uhh, that hurts. like really fucking hurts.
i nodded in agreement.
"i hate that you keep torturing yourself for this..." he said to me. pitying me for what i am to him
"no, don't be...I...I'm just hoping that we w-would continue being friends like, this..I" a tear accidentally came out of my eye as I tried to explain it to him.
he stood there in silence.
"I just still want to be someone you can lean on to, even if you don't really like me back or anything, no, I...just want to be your friend..."
now i can't stop my tears from coming out. i'm glad that the cashier finally gave in and slept so he wouldn't hear me sobbing at the corner because of the man right beside me.
i can't really look at him straight in the eyes because he's going to hurt me more, so my eyes just wandered everywhere around the store, avoiding his..face.
i know that kun doesn't really know how to react to this, to me.
so he just pulled me by the hand to keep me close to him, my left cheek on his chest as he rubbed up and down my back to calm me down from crying.
my hands gave in to him, and weakly held onto the hem of his shirt to keep him close to me even more.
and it helped me calm down, but the pain of it was still lingering inside me...
and i'm already okay with that.
now playing: backburner by niki
53 notes · View notes
moonlezn · 6 months
Text
The Story Of Us V
— Isso é amor? Kun Qian Segundo Ato: Getaway Car
Tumblr media Tumblr media Tumblr media
nada bom começa num carro de fuga.
notas: oficialmente acabamos o penúltimo capítulo de the story of us. ai, tô nervosa! o final deste ato vai dar o que falar... hahahah.
Tumblr media
A chuva cai sem perdão agora, justo porque você esqueceu o guarda-chuva uma vez no ano. Reclamar não é uma opção, a noite foi tão divertida pelo reencontro de alguns colegas de turma da faculdade, uma chuvinha torrencial que encharca suas roupas é pequena demais para te fazer ficar estressada. 
Mas não dá para conter os xingamentos quando absolutamente todos os táxis ignoram seus sinais. Já era de se imaginar, né, todos os ocupados. 
E se eu der uma voltinha no quarteirão? 
A rua cheia de bares e restaurantes não facilitaria sua busca, mas talvez algumas ruas adiante consiga. Além do mais, já está toda molhada mesmo. 
Apesar de ser um bairro diferente do seu, atravessar pelas esquinas não é tão difícil. O problema é que, mesmo olhando para todos os lados, não há um carro amarelo sequer, e para piorar, o movimento de pessoas também é menor. 
Apressa os passos, virando à esquerda e quase comemora ao ver um táxi parado. Assim, de bobeira. Corre os poucos metros que os separam e entra com tudo no banco de trás, assustando o motorista é claro. 
— Boa noite, moço. — sacode os cabelos. — Caramba, tá muito difícil achar carro hoje. 
— Dona, o táxi tá ocupado. — o senhorzinho avisa, com pena nos olhos. Você vasculha o carro e não vê ninguém. Como se a entendesse, ele continua. — Tô esperando o rapaz que agendou com a cooperativa, mas confesso que ele tá um tantinho atrasado. 
Uma luz de esperança surge no seu corpo tenso. 
— Qual a tolerância de atraso? 
— Ele tem mais 2 minutos. 
Isso! 
— Tem problema eu esperar aqui, então? Não, né? 
O senhor balança a cabeça negativamente, e você suspira já cantando vitória. Em poucos minutos estaria em casa. 
Quando um elevador sobe rápido demais, também cai facilmente.
A porta do táxi abre de repente, e um homem alto e forte entra, fugindo dos pingos grossos que ainda não deram trégua. O motorista te olha pelo espelho retrovisor com dó, mas também engole seco. Como iria explicar? Você revira os olhos e bufa, finalmente sendo notada pelo outro.
— Boa noite, senhor. Nós vamos para o… Quem é você? — ele pergunta ao reparar sua presença e passar os olhos pela sua figura. 
— Eu já vou sair, me perdoa, eu…
O rosto é familiar. Familiar demais. Mas é impossível. Ele ainda está na… 
Não consegue terminar de raciocinar porque o estranho sorri para você, também te reconhece, agora que realmente se veem. E esse sorriso é impossível ser de outro alguém. 
Suas mãos tremem um pouco, e o coração bate mais rápido. Definitivamente ele está diferente, porém alguns traços são exatamente os mesmos. Delicados, perfeitinhos. 
— Jaemin? — sai como uma pergunta trêmula. — Que coincidência! 
— Nossa! Sim! Eu… nem sei o que te dizer. Quanto tempo! — ele ri de verdade, preenchendo o ambiente apertado com o som que não ouvia há anos. 
— Pois é! — você o segue, envergonhada. — Não sabia que você tinha voltado pra cá, achei que estivesse na Alemanha ainda. 
— Ninguém sabe, é recente. — confessa num sussurro. Parecia lhe contar um segredo, e você nota pela expressão brincalhona que o carisma ainda é uma de suas qualidades. — Cheguei tem pouco tempo, tô num projeto novo. Mas e você? 
É então que se dá conta da situação em que está. Completamente tomada pela chuva e ainda por cima roubando o transporte alheio. 
— Tô bem, melhor do que eu mereço. — desconversa, querendo adiantar o pedido de desculpas. — Olha, foi mal por isso. — gesticula para o carro. — Eu já tô indo, vou deixar você ir pra casa. Foi um prazer te ver de novo! 
Cedendo à vontade de fugir, segura firme na bolsa e abre a porta; Jaemin, todavia, impede que saia do carro antes mesmo que coloque as pernas para fora. 
— Não, tá maior chuva. — ele passa os olhos pelo seu rosto, parece pensar em algo. — Teria problema a gente alterar a rota? — pergunta ao motorista. 
— Não, problema nenhum, senhor. — teria sim, só que não deixaria uma moça na rua essa hora da noite. Para tudo tem um jeitinho. 
— Então tá resolvido. Te levo em casa e depois vou pra minha, não aceito não como resposta. 
A cada palavra que ele diz, sua mente te leva de volta aos seus quinze, dezesseis anos. Você assente devagar, ainda um pouco estatelada, e então ouve o ronco leve do motor. Vê-lo pelo instagram muito raramente é completamente diferente de agora. Incomparável. 
Foi uma grata surpresa, porque, além de ser o seu primeiro amor, Jaemin também te ajudou demais com a proposta de dividirem o táxi. Outra coisa sobre ele que não mudou foi a facilidade para conversar, ouviu-o tagarelar sobre assuntos aleatórios, rindo das expressões exageradas que fazia ao enfatizar uma ideia. Parecia que os anos sem se ver não eram nada para ele.
Chegando no seu endereço, você se despediu com um abraço fajuto e entregou o dinheiro da corrida para o motorista sem que o menino visse. 
— Obrigada, Nana. Foi muito legal te ver! Até… 
Jaemin sorri grande ao ouvir o apelido antigo. Há tempos ninguém o chamava assim. 
— Eu te mando uma mensagem pra gente botar a conversa em dia direito. — espera alguma aprovação sua, que vem em forma de um sorriso tímido. — Boa noite. 
Ele te observa sair do carro e disparar até o lobby, onde é recebida pelo porteiro preocupado e sua bronca paternal. 
O motorista limpa a garganta. 
— Podemos ir? 
— Uhm, sim, sim. Claro. 
Aquilo definitivamente foi um sonho. Mas Jaemin?
Grogue e irritada pelo despertador, se senta na cama e repassa os eventos da noite anterior. 
Amigos, faculdade, chuva… Jaemin. Que loucura. 
Começa a cumprir a rotina no modo automático, pensando em como ele está diferente, e se você também tinha deixado a mesma impressão. E se ele também acha que te ver de novo foi muito esquisito. Esquisito bom. 
Já com a bolsa toda pronta, a campainha irritante te assusta. 
— Bom dia, chatinho. 
— Já fui mais amado, hein? — Kun deixa um selinho nos seus lábios depois que você fecha a porta. — Bom dia, linda. 
Você sorri empática, sentindo a mesma ardência na barriga de sempre. Desde que dormiram juntos, Kun se aproximou mais: mãos dadas no carro, selinhos de cumprimento, expectativas… Tudo que você não estava procurando quando deu em cima dele. A cada dia que deixa ele pensar que tinham algo além de casual, a culpa dentro de você cresce. 
Não têm absolutamente nada rolando, mas por alguma razão você não consegue deixar claro. E, como se fosse óbvio, não acha que dê para terminar algo que não existe. 
No carro, por fim, tem tempo para checar o celular. Algumas notificações aparecem na tela: Yang, mãe, os amigos de ontem e Jaemin. Ignora todas as outras mensagens e, vencida pela curiosidade, abre o instagram e espera o aplicativo carregar com muita agonia. 
Jaemin: não te perdoei por ter pago a corrida sem eu ver
Jaemin: agora eu tô te devendo uma
Jaemin: amanhã cê tá livre na hora do almoço? 
A sua expressão chocada chama atenção de Kun. Preocupado, repousa a mão na sua coxa por um instante e deixa dois apertos ali. 
— Tá tudo bem?
— Hã? 
— Sua cara… aconteceu alguma coisa? 
— Não, é… um amigo que não vejo há anos me mandou mensagem. 
Silêncio. 
Kun repara suas respostas curtas, sua distância, repara quando tenta evitá-lo no trabalho… Ele só não quer admitir para si mesmo que sabe o que isso significa. Na verdade, já reconhece, mas não vai permitir que sua chance se perca assim. 
— Hoje eu vou ter umas reuniões, mas amanhã a gente pode almoçar? — ele pergunta, já no elevador. 
— Amanhã eu tenho um compromisso. Acho que não vai dar. Outro dia? — sorri e avança pelo corredor quando as portas abrem. 
O dia será longo, e Kun não tem tempo para pensar nisso agora. Entre os encontros com representantes, gerentes, líderes de equipe, ele te espia pela janela. Força um sorriso aqui e ali, encontra as soluções para as pendências dos contratos, mas o pensamento não desfoca de você, principalmente quando te ver sorrir para o celular várias e várias vezes. 
Amigo? Compromisso? 
Não gosta nada disso. No entanto, sabe que não tem o direito de ter ciúmes e muito menos de questionar algo. 
No dia seguinte, a mesma coisa se repete. A única diferença é que o beijo que ele tenta te dar vai para a bochecha, você desvia. Conversam sobre qualquer coisa no carro, mas Kun percebe que está se forçando a criar assuntos, não é natural. 
Os sorrisos ao usar o celular escondido são maiores, as risadinhas causam nele pequenas pontadas de desânimo. Talvez se ele tentar conversar… 
Kun se levanta para ir em direção à sua mesa, porém bem quando abre a porta da própria sala, você pega suas coisas e deixa o escritório. Horário do almoço, é claro. Não contém um suspiro frustrado, voltando para a posição anterior. 
Num dos restaurantes executivos perto do prédio, você encontra Jaemin Na já te esperando numa das mesas do recinto agitado. Ele acena para que o veja, então caminha até ele, animada. 
— Você gosta de peixe, né? — faz a pergunta que estava ensaiando nos minutos passados, não conseguia lembrar disso. 
— O quê? — finge estar magoada pela falta de memória do homem. — Gosto sim, claro. — relaxa a expressão rígida e ri, fazendo com que ele relaxasse. 
— Pô, que bom! Porque eu pedi isso pra gente dividir. 
— Hmmm, gostei. — belisca um dos pães como aperitivo. — Bom, me conta tudo, né. Cê disse que queria colocar conversa em dia. 
Jaemin começa a, novamente, tagarelar sobre como veio parar aqui. Ele abriu uma empresa de consultoria na Alemanha que começou a fazer sucesso, mas ele sempre teve interesse nas áreas de publicidade e propaganda. Acabou que, há um ano atrás, conheceu um cara que estava no país estudando exatamente sobre isso. 
O encontro foi engraçado, se conheceram em uma festa da amiga da amiga de Jaemin, que estudava na mesma turma do tal amigo. Foram apresentados e clicaram na hora, foram os chatos que conversaram a noite toda sobre carreira. Honestamente, achou que não ia dar em nada, só que dali floresceu uma amizade. E, aos poucos, a ideia de abrir uma agência de publicidade juntos surgiu. Jaemin entraria para administrar, e ele com a mão de obra.
Quando o cara precisou voltar ao próprio país, eles já tinham todo um esquema pronto. Por que não tentar? Alguns investidores toparam o compromisso, e eles agora estão trabalhando juntos para erguer um nome. 
— Você precisa conhecer ele, mas a agenda tá complicada. — Jaemin checa o celular. — Ah, não, calma. Sexta a gente se deu folga, bora num pub ou jantar? Acho que vocês vão se dar bem. 
Às sextas, você normalmente passa um tempo com Kun. Hesita um instante, então resolve aceitar o convite. Não faria mal. 
— Eu tô livre sim. — beberica o pouco que falta do suco. — Mas tem certeza? 
— Quê? Claro! Vai ser legal, vai. 
— Tá bom, então. Tudo bem.
Terminam de almoçar entre algumas piadas e as expectativas para a próxima saída. Depois, Jaemin te acompanhou até a editora a pé, disse que seria bom conhecer a área melhor, ainda estava perdido. Despediram-se com um abraço mais digno hoje, a vergonha foi deixada um pouco de lado. Ainda é estranho interagir com ele, mas é tão engraçado. 
Tumblr media
Kun: qual filme você escolheu pra amanhã?
Seu aparelho vibra sobre a mesa no meio do expediente. 
A reação definitivamente não foi a que ele esperava. Você o olha através do vidro, culpada. 
você: esqueci de te avisar, mas vou encontrar um amigo amanhã. me desculpa?
Ele toma o lábio inferior nos dentes, força um sorriso e balança a cabeça. Você se sente aliviada e murmura um obrigada de longe. 
Ainda valeria a pena tentar esclarecer as coisas ou será que deve deixar tudo como está? Não aprecia a ideia de perder você, especialmente sua amizade. Afinal de contas, são amigos antes de tudo. Talvez só não insistir mais na ideia de vocês dois juntos fosse o suficiente. 
Por isso, resolve abrir outra mensagem, uma que ainda não tinha respondido porque tinha esperança. Ainda tem, na verdade. Possivelmente isso seja uma oportunidade de espairecer. 
Kun: te pego às oito, pode ser?
Rachel: perfeito
Enquanto você se arruma, pensa na pasta rosa bebê que está dentro da caixa que está na prateleira mais alta da sua estante, te encarando de cima. Lembra pouco dos detalhes do primeiro namoro, e se sente feliz por ter guardado aquilo. Algum dia, não hoje, tomaria coragem para abrir. No momento só quer se divertir com um velho amigo. 
Jaemin: já chegamos aqui
Jaemin: mandei um carro te buscar, deve estar chegando aí 
Você penteia o cabelo mais rápido e põe o perfume antes de sair apressada, toda atrapalhada. Ao trancar a porta, dá de cara com Kun e uma mulher, chegando de algum lugar.
A situação é um pouco constrangedora, o clima pesa e Kun sente o pescoço esquentar. A menina apenas olha de um para o outro, confusa. Seu sorriso, entretanto, não se desfaz em nenhum centímetro. 
— Boa noite. — ela cumprimenta para quebrar o gelo do silêncio tenso que havia se instaurado. 
— Boa noite! — Kun e você dizem juntos, ele se sente um idiota por não saber como agir agora. 
— Essa aqui é a Rachel, e essa é a minha vizinha e companheira lá na editora. 
Rachel? A ex dele? Kun foi noivo dela por alguns meses, segundo a história que ele havia lhe contado. Terminaram mal, se reconciliaram, brigaram de novo e, pelo visto, estão se falando de novo. Bom pra ele, então, apesar da situação ser delicada. 
— Oi, Rachel, prazer, viu? — deveria complementar com um o Kun fala muito de você? ou seria mais estranho ainda? 
Você olha para o vizinho, e nota seu semblante assustado, ansioso. Decide, portanto, ir embora logo. 
— Eu tenho que ir, gente. Boa sexta! 
Não espera ouvir a resposta e aperta os passos para aproveitar que o elevador está parado no andar. Respira fundo para aliviar a tensão e tenta não deixar que os pensamentos sobre Kun com a ex te atormentem, ele sabe se cuidar bem. 
É normal ficar nervosa para ver o seu primeiro ex-namorado? Com certeza é. Né?
O pub está cheio, a música é agradável e não muito alta. Caminhar entre os grupos é mais fácil do que parece, mas achar Jaemin entre os rostos demora um pouco. Reconhece-o pelo sorriso outra vez, ele mexe no celular numa das mesas mais reservadas e está sozinho. 
— Ahh, finalmente! — Jaemin levanta para te abraçar rapidamente, puxando uma das cadeiras para que se sentasse.
— Cadê seu amigo? — pergunta e olha para os lados, ansiosa para conhecê-lo.
— Foi no banheiro rapidinho, deve estar voltando já. — ele bloqueia o celular e guarda na bolsa. — Quer alguma coisa pra beber? 
— Pode ser uma cerveja. 
Jaemin sinaliza para alguém no bar, e você acompanha a direção com o olhar. Aproveita, então, para reparar tudo com mais calma. Estranho nunca ter ido ali, é aconchegante e o ambiente é super leve. As pessoas falam alto, assistem o jogo que passa na TV e comemoram ou desaprovam o desenrolar da partida como se fossem amigos de longa data. 
Um homem traz sua bebida, você o vê atravessar o balcão e vir até a mesa onde estão. Assim que ele deposita a caneca enorme na sua frente, você dá uma golada. Estava precisando.
— Vai com calma, hein. — Jaemin provoca, a risada te deixa sem graça. 
Antes de rebater, o ranger da cadeira vazia interrompe a conversa. O olhar do menino que voltou do banheiro encontra o seu, e perceptivelmente vocês congelam. 
Quais são as chances? 
Demorou poucos segundos para que se reconhecessem, é claro. Óbvio. O ar para na sua garganta fechada, se tentasse disfarçar com a cerveja não funcionaria. Quando se trata dele, é difícil o seu mundo não parar. 
Não esperava rever Jaemin tão cedo, mas ele, nada teria te preparado, nem se fosse avisada com antecedência. Pois ele é… ele. 
A ferida no seu coração lateja um breve segundo enquanto analisa os traços tão surpresos quanto os seus. Os cabelos lisos agora caindo sobre as bochechas, um quê de maturidade na expressão outrora mais jovial, os lábios cheinhos que não sabem como proferir um cumprimento… continua lindo. 
— Eu, é… você… — ele é o primeiro a falar. 
Jaemin analisa a cena com as sobrancelhas unidas, claramente existe algo aí. 
— Vocês se conhecem? — o outro questiona, mesmo sabendo a resposta. 
Você desenha círculos na superfície de madeira com as unhas, olhando de um para o outro.
— Sim.
— Não. — mente sem nem saber o motivo. — Quer dizer, sim. — se corrige antes que ele pudesse te interpretar mal. 
— Que coincidência, né. — Jaemin está desconfiado, mas também muito perdido. — Vocês vão ficar se olhando como se fossem fantasmas a noite toda ou vão me contar como se conhecem? 
Você solta uma risada super forçada, ele ainda não diz nada. Não sabia que te ver de novo causaria uma comoção dessas nele, o interior está completamente bagunçado. 
O que resta saber é se é bom ou ruim. 
Para você, um reencontro assim só pode significar uma coisa.
60 notes · View notes
ronjunnie · 12 days
Text
KUN FIC RECOMMENDATIONS
Tumblr media
SERIES
ONESHOTS
romance is dead (19.4) sequel (10.3k)
sleepless cinderella: kun (12.9k)
one hundredth page (10.8k)
crayons (5.4k)
promise (4k)
subscribe! i want a baby now (2.4k)
finding gilberth (1.2k) 2.0 (1.7k)
TIMESTAMPS
25 notes · View notes
xiaojunsmintchoco · 1 year
Text
Gave you my heart — Qian Kun
Tumblr media
pairing: qian kun x female reader
genre: fluff, best friends to lovers, fake relationship au
synopsis: a christmas family gathering, several nosy relatives, and a fake boyfriend – who knew these would lead to your wish that even santa could not fulfill. 
wc: about 4.3k
a/n: hey there @meiideryz! it’s me, amelia, your secret santa 🤶🏻 I hope that this fic adds to your Christmas cheer! Merry Christmas, stay safe and have a wonderful holiday <3
⋆*̣̥☆·͙̥‧❄•̥̩̥͙‧·‧̩̥‧̩̥·‧•̥̩̥͙‧·‧̩̥˟͙☃˟͙‧̩̥·‧•̥̩̥͙‧·‧̩̥•̥̩̥͙‧·‧̩̥❄‧·͙̥̣☆*̣̥ ⋆
"How much does it cost to rent a fake boyfriend?" 
"I'm sorry what?" Thinking you were joking, Kun looks up from his coffee, an amused expression gracing his features, only to find a deadpan expression on your face. "Why so sudden?" he asks. 
You groan, fingers furiously flying across the tiny screen of your phone. "You know how my family does those big Christmas gatherings every single year without fail?" 
Kun nods, already putting two and two together. "Let me guess – you want to avoid the incessant questioning about why you're still single," he answers.
"Bingo". You answer with a snap of your fingers, continuing to type away on the screen. "'Is it that no one wants you?' 'Must find boyfriend fast, women got expiry date leh'," you mock your family members in a high-pitched voice, specifically the aunties, making Kun laugh out loud. "Yeah, no thanks. That's why I need a fake boyfriend – and fast. The gathering's in a week, and we’re going to some Christmas carnival". 
"You could have just asked me, you know?" Kun doesn't know why, but the words just leave him and he has to summon all his willpower to stop his hands from flying up to cover his mouth. Sure, he'd been nursing a secret crush on you – but he hadn't quite dared to make any move on you, for fear of spoiling the friendship you two already had, and this was the closest he had come to doing so, albeit unintentionally. 
You pause your frantic googling for fake boyfriend services and stare at your friend, unsure if you'd heard him right. "Wait, say that again?" 
"I mean, I can do it for you. Follow you to the Christmas carnival, talk to your relatives, play carnival games with you guys, and that's it. Seems fine to me," Kun says with a nonchalant shrug, acting like whatever he just said earlier wasn't a slip of the tongue. 
The gears in your head begin turning as you contemplate his offer. You knew that he'd be a choice selection of a fake boyfriend – he was the textbook definition of a gentleman. All the years you'd been friends, he was always the one holding doors open for you, listening to your rambles, and just simply taking the best care he could of you. In addition, he had many talents. All of this, coupled with his otherworldly good looks, make him perfect boyfriend material-
-okay, calm down now y/n, you're just friends, you gently chide yourself. But yes, he would definitely be able to impress your family, even the most critical aunties, which would hopefully get them to leave you alone for future family gatherings. Which was the whole point of you getting a fake boyfriend. In addition, Kun would benefit too since he'd get to earn some money – so win-win, right? 
But there was one problem – a wish that he was more than just your friend had begun to grow, just like the blanket of snow that had been thickening since the beginning of winter. You worried that if you really were to take his offer, your feelings would only grow, and come in between the precious friendship you two had built up over the course of several years.
Then again, considering how badly you really needed a fake boyfriend, taking his offer probably would be the best option at the present point. "Alright then, if you say so," you finally decide. "How much should I pay you?"
"Ah- there's no need for that," Kun quickly replies, waving his hands in protest. "You're my friend, I should help you out". 
For some reason, these words send a rush of butterflies to your stomach. Trying to conceal the dash of pink that you were sure coloured your cheeks, you bring your head down to sip at your coffee. Fortunately it works, and you properly address him again after, sending him a playful glare. "Fine. But I'll treat you to a sumptuous meal in return, you better not say no".
Kun sighs, knowing that he wouldn't be able to talk you out of that one. "Well, if you insist. Just send me the details of the gathering and we'll be good to go," he answers, whipping out his phone.
"Thank you so much, Kun," you respond, flashing him a smile of appreciation.
"Anytime". He simply replies with one word and a gentle smile. 
You forward him the messages from your family group chat, all while reminding yourself that he was a fake boyfriend, not a real one, and that the line between best friend and boyfriend would still exist. At the same time, you do your best to ignore the tinge of pain in your heart that accompanied the warm feeling of gratitude. 
⋆*̣̥☆·͙̥‧❄•̥̩̥͙‧·‧̩̥‧̩̥·‧•̥̩̥͙‧·‧̩̥˟͙☃˟͙‧̩̥·‧•̥̩̥͙‧·‧̩̥•̥̩̥͙‧·‧̩̥❄‧·͙̥̣☆*̣̥ ⋆
"You two were dating? For how long?" Your brother, Hendery, queries, agape mouth giving away his astonishment. 
It's Christmas Eve, and you and Kun are now in your dad's car with mum, dad and older brother, on the way to your family's Christmas gathering. 
"Yeah, for about a month," Kun helps you answer when he catches sight of the panicked look that flashes across your face. 
"You can pick your jaw up off the floor now," you add, taking the chance to tease your brother. 
"I knew that you were close to each other, but I didn't know that you both were dating," your father hums, fingers tapping on the steering wheel. “Luckily I bought an extra ticket, just in case y/n shows up with some ‘surprise’, if you know what I mean. And she did,” he finishes, shooting you an amused look from the rear view mirror. 
“Dad,” you groan, albeit goodnaturedly.
"It’s a pleasant surprise, though. Not only does Kun take excellent care of y/n, he's also a great influence on her," your mum chimes.
"Mm, I agree," your dad muses.
"Thank you auntie and uncle, you're too kind," Kun chuckles, humbly downplaying your parents' compliments.  
So if we really were to date, we'd have the approval of my parents… you entertain the thought for a moment, before slapping yourself mentally. You knew that Kun was only helping you, and that a relationship between you both was not likely to be on the cards at all.
Before you know it, your family has arrived at the carnival’s carpark. “Act, now,” you mouth to Kun, hoping that none of your family picks up on the subtle cue you gave him. Kun understands, and helps you out of the car before slipping his hand into yours, and the both of you follow after your parents, over to the fairgrounds where the rest of your family is.
“Y/n! Long time no see!” One of your aunts, Auntie Diana, comes straight up to you and engulfs you in a hug too tight for your liking, which you reluctantly return. She then looks up and sees your friend next to you. “Is this your boyfriend?”
“Yes, he is. Meet Kun,” you respond, gently pushing your friend slightly in front of you so he could introduce himself to your aunt. 
“Oh my gosh. Selene! Wendy! Y/n’s finally found someone, after all this time!” Auntie Diana exclaims, and two of your other aunts come rushing over. 
“Hi aunties, I’m Kun. It’s nice to meet you all,” Kun introduces himself politely with a small bow. 
“Wah, y/n, congratulations! Thought no one would want you, but you proved us wrong,” Auntie Wendy teases.
Your aunts then proceed to bombard him with questions, such as why he decided to date you, what your relationship goals were, and several other questions. How naturally he answered them should have been a sign of his obvious interest to you, but it wasn’t. You just played it off as him being an excellent actor.
“What do you like best about her?” Auntie Selene asks. All of your aunts regard him with the same expectant gaze. 
“Well, for starters, she’s a kind and genuine person to everyone. I really admire her resilience too — for all the time I’ve known her, she’s shown herself to be tough, even through hard circumstances,” Kun answers with barely a second thought. “Her sense of humour also never fails to make me look forward to going out with her as well. I mean, there’s more that I like about her, but if I were to list them all we’d be stuck here forever,” he adds with a nervous laugh. 
“Wow, you really do like her, don’t you,” Auntie Diana says. “Y/n, you’ve found a good guy, must treat him well,” she advises as you acknowledge her with a grunt and a polite smile.  
“Wow y/n, you’ve got this guy all whipped for you,” Hendery, who was on the sidelines listening to the exchange, grins and reaches over to ruffle your hair teasingly yet affectionately.
“Yeah, yeah”. You casually play off your brother’s teasing as you usually do, ignoring that twinge of pain making its presence known in your heart again.
Meanwhile, Kun observes the scene, your aunt’s words ringing in his heart. Oh, y/n, if only you knew.
“Y/n-jie!” A happy shriek disrupts his train of thought. Looking down, he’s met with a tiny girl with a red backpack running to you as fast as her legs could carry her. 
“Kyla!” you exclaim, bending down to receive a hug from your young cousin, who you loved with all your heart. She was one of the few reasons you decided to attend today’s family gathering, the other being that you wanted to catch up with your other cousins later. 
It’s at this moment Kyla notices the boy beside you. “I’m Kyla,” she introduces herself bashfully. “Auntie Selene told me you’re y/n’s boyfriend?”
Kun’s heart melts at the sight of her, finding her adorable. “Yes, I’m her boyfriend,” he answers, kneeling down to be at her eye level. “You can call me Kun-ge,” he tells her, offering her a fist bump which she happily returns.
“Alright, everyone, we can talk more later,” your uncle decides, clapping his hands to get the whole family’s attention. “Let’s get going, it’s time to enjoy this carnival!”
You follow after your family, one hand holding Kyla's and the other holding Kun's, relieved that your fake boyfriend ploy was successful so far.
⋆*̣̥☆·͙̥‧❄•̥̩̥͙‧·‧̩̥‧̩̥·‧•̥̩̥͙‧·‧̩̥˟͙☃˟͙‧̩̥·‧•̥̩̥͙‧·‧̩̥•̥̩̥͙‧·‧̩̥❄‧·͙̥̣☆*̣̥ ⋆
A couple of hours had passed, mainly consisting of you trying to avoid more awkward conversations with your aunts, sampling delicious carnival food with Kun (who was more than willing to treat you), going on rides with your other cousins and enjoying a long chat with them. Of course, they were curious to know more about your new supposed boyfriend, and talked with him as well. Now, you and Kun were at the dart stall, trying to win Kyla a stuffed bunny.
Eyes locked on the red balloon, Kun aims his dart at his target before throwing his dart at it with the precision of a sharpshooter. As expected, it bursts on contact with the dart. “Yay! Thank you so much, Kun-ge!” Kyla squeals as Kun hands her the stuffed bunny, before throwing her arms around his neck. “You’re the best!”
“You’re welcome,” he replies softly, the same fond smile appearing once again.
“Kun-ge, may I ask you a question?” Kyla asks, innocently batting her eyelashes as she looks up at your “boyfriend”.
“Sure, go ahead,” he replies. After all, she was just a kid, her questions would just be innocent, harmless fun, right?
“Since you and y/n jie are boyfriend and girlfriend now, that means…” she trails off, looking ahead into the distance as she considers her words. "You'll both get married, and then you'll really be my Kun-ge forever, right?" She finishes, eyes bright with all of her 5-year old excitement, glancing up at him expectantly.
"Well-" he can't lie, the question has caught him off guard, and he tries to conjure up a response quickly. "Maybe? Right now, it's too early for us to know for sure. We’ll see in the future, alright?”
“I hope that you and y/n can get married, and then we’ll be a family!” Kyla exclaims, clinging on to Kun’s leg. “I like you a lot, and I like y/n jie and Hendery-ge a lot too!”
Kun doesn’t speak, but bends down to pat her head gently. He puts together the scene that Kyla described — and his heart warms at the thought of all of you being a family. A complete, wonderful family. As he’s relishing this fantasy, a “ho ho ho!” steals Kyla’s attention. It’s a man dressed in a santa outfit surrounded by elves, giving out candy to children. “Y/n-jie jie! Santa’s giving out candy, let’s go!” Kyla yells,  turns around. “Kun-ge! Hendery-ge! Let’s go!” she beckons to them with a wave of her tiny hand.
Just as Kun is about to agree, Hendery stops him and stoops down in front of your cousin. “Kyla, I need to speak to Kun-ge alone for a little while. Why don’t you go ahead with y/n-jie first?” he says, kind brown eyes meeting her gaze. 
“Why? What do you need to talk about?” she asks, her five-year old self obviously not understanding. But to be honest, you didn’t either. Sure, Hendery had met Kun prior to this, but their interactions never extended beyond polite small talk. And suddenly they had things to discuss by themselves?
“Oh erm, it’s, you know, bro talk,” he laughs nervously, garbling out what he thought would be an understandable reason to your cousin. “It’s something only guys understand. Tell you what, you take y/n-jie with you, and then Kun-ge and I will find you guys later, okay?”
Though Kyla doesn’t fully understand, she simply nods earnestly, before tugging on your arm again. “y/n-jie, let’s go! See you later, geges!” she giggles, skipping ahead. Though you're curious to know what the two boys had to discuss, you decide not to pry and follow your cousin.
Much to Hendery’s relief, the adults are still engrossed in their own conversations, leaving him and Kun some privacy to talk. “You said you wanted to talk? What about?” Kun poses the question to Hendery, furrowing his brows in confusion. 
Hendery says nothing, instead watching both you and Kyla run further into the fairgrounds. “You really like y/n, don’t you?” He finally says after about a minute.
“Of course I do,” Kun replies, not seeing where the conversation was headed. “Why else would I date her then?”
“You guys aren’t really dating,” Hendery calmly continues, returning his gaze to Kun. “You’re her fake boyfriend for tonight, aren’t you?”
"What do you mean, fake boyfriend?” Kun answers with his own question, feigning confusion. “We’re officially together”.
Hendery shakes his head, indicating that he doesn’t believe Kun. “Nope. Don’t even try lying. I know the whole truth. Y/n didn't want the family to bother her about still being single, so she wanted a fake boyfriend for tonight. You offered to help her, so here you are," he remarks, showing that he indeed wasn't lying – he knew the truth.
"Now how do you know – did y/n tell you?" Kun responds, still shocked after Hendery's accurate retelling of your situation. Did you tell him anything? That was unlikely, since the whole point of a fake boyfriend was for you to be able to throw your family off the trail. Telling Hendery, a family member, would only be counter effective.
"Nope. Heard her over the phone," he answers, recalling the phone conversation you'd had with one of your friends last night. “I didn’t eavesdrop on purpose. She was just so damn loud,” he clarifies as Kun shoots him a questioning look.
“Okay, congrats then — you have us busted,” Kun admits with a shrug as he turns back to where a grinning Kyla stood next to “santa”, posing as you snapped some photographs of her with your phone. “But why was this so important that you had to pull me aside for ‘bro time’?” 
“I wanted to ask you to confess to her”. Hendery stops beating around the bush, getting straight to the point. 
Hendery’s statement sends Kun’s jaw to the ground in the next second. “What? No way!” He protests.
“Why not? Since you like her so much, might as well tell her, right?” Hendery reasons.
“I don’t even think she likes me back that way. If I were to just tell her how I really felt about her, I could spoil our whole friendship,” Kun explains, expressing his previously unspoken fears to your brother, who grunts understandingly as he listens. “I’m not throwing away four years’ worth of friendship just because of this stupid crush”.
“I beg to differ,” Hendery interjects. “She likes you too. Legit”.
“She said that?” Kun inquires.
“Well, over the phone yesterday, yes. ‘I know he’s only a fake boyfriend, but I like him so much! I’m afraid though — what if I tell him I like him but he doesn’t like me that way? I’ll ruin our whole friendship!’” Hendery remarks, imitating your tone of voice as you complained about your dilemma to your friend yesterday, drawing some laughs out of Kun. 
“Wait — you’re serious?” he asks, morsels of hope beginning to appear — like the first flakes of snow falling from the sky.
“I’m serious”. Hendery replies, sending Kun a firm nod of reassurance. “Based on what I’ve heard from her, I’m positive she won’t reject you. Tell you what, can you promise me one thing?”
“What’s that?” Kun asks, curiosity piqued as he awaits your brother’s answer. 
“By the end of tonight, you confess to her. I don’t care how you do it, you just gotta tell her how you feel,” Hendery states, holding out his pinky finger. “Promise to do that? I’ve known her for the entire 17 years of her existence, so trust me when I say not only will she not reject you, you'll make her whole Christmas. Besides, you’re the only guy I really trust to take care of her”. 
Hendery’s last sentence warms Kun’s heart like hot cocoa on a snowy day, and it gives him the final push to make his decision as he links his pinky with Hendery’s. “Promise”.
“And remember, if she happens to reject you, though that’s as likely as the dinosaurs resurrecting from the dead-“ Hendery pulls out his own business card from his coat pocket, and hands it to Kun. “You can text or call me, and I’ll talk to you as soon as I’m free. Don’t worry, you’ve got this,” he reassures, giving Kun a pat on the back.
Kun stuffs the card in his coat pocket, feeling immense gratitude towards Hendery. If not for him, he wouldn’t have the courage to tell you how he really felt. “Thank you so much, Hendery”.
“Anytime,” Hendery answers with a smile. “Now come on, let’s go catch up with them!”
⋆*̣̥☆·͙̥‧❄•̥̩̥͙‧·‧̩̥‧̩̥·‧•̥̩̥͙‧·‧̩̥˟͙☃˟͙‧̩̥·‧•̥̩̥͙‧·‧̩̥•̥̩̥͙‧·‧̩̥❄‧·͙̥̣☆*̣̥ ⋆
“AAAAHHH!” You scream at the top of your lungs as the Viking swings up with a jolt, before swinging back down. Adrenaline courses through your veins as you continue to scream in both exhilaration and fear. Kun’s screams fill your ears as well, though you know that it’s most likely from thrill and elation — through the years you’d known him, he’d proven to be very much the adrenaline junkie.
“Are you alright?” Kun laughs as he helps you off, though seeing your dazed state as you stumble off the ride concerns him slightly. 
“That was awful…why did we go on that one…” you pant. 
“I mean, this was part of our ‘battle plan’, was it not? Before we went I even asked you if you really wanted to go on this ride!” Kun reminds you, still laughing at your disorientated state.
The ‘battle plan’ he was referring to was the plan that both of you had come up with together to, in your words, “conquer the whole carnival”, including the remaining food stalls and rides. Your family had left, but both of you had opted to stay and continue exploring the rest of the carnival. 
“You’re right”. You admit. “Let’s move on. I wanna drink hot chocolate”.
Which is how both of you end up sharing a massive hot chocolate, topped with a generous amount of whipped cream and chocolate syrup, walking around the fairgrounds together. Though this isn’t the first time you and Kun have shared drinks, this time as you take the paper cup from him and sip on the chocolatey goodness in it, you feel the all-too-familiar fluttering in your tummy again. The feeling disappears momentarily, but then returns with a vengeance when you notice how your hands are interlocked with his. Whether he realised it too or not, you would never know, but it sends a heat wave to your cheeks, causing you to subtly turn away and try to get the blushing under control. Part of you wants to hastily pull your hand out of his grip, but the other part of you can’t bring yourself to do it — as if your hand is stuck to his by super glue. 
Unbeknownst to you, Kun is struggling to subdue the fluttering of his own heart as well, even more so after realising your hands were still linked. By the end of tonight, you confess to her. Hendery’s words from earlier still ring fresh in his mind. Earlier, he had made that promise as some sort of brazen confidence had come over him while he was chatting with Hendery, but it had gone as soon as it had come, which he found mildly annoying. Whatever, since I promised Hendery, I better get it done, he tells himself, summoning his determination again. 
“We’ve got a last ride to go on, right?” your voice draws him out of his thoughts, and he turns to you with a small nod. 
“It’s the ferris wheel, if I’m not wrong,” Kun adds. “Let’s go”.
Hands still intertwined, both of you head to the queue. There are fewer people than you expected, due to the fact that it’s getting late, which allows you both the luxury of one capsule to yourselves. Both of you sit in silence, admiring the view of the fair as your capsule begins to rise up into the air. The colourful lights and neon signs, the tents of the different food and game stalls, the sweet scent of cotton candy that wafts straight to you — you sit in silence with Kun, your hand still in his (to your mild embarrassment), soaking in all of the sights and smells of the fair. “Wonderful, isn’t it?” you remark to Kun as he raises the cup to his lips.
“It really is,” he agrees. “But you know what would make this night even more wonderful?”
“What?”
“If you could give me your heart,” Kun finishes.
A moment of silence follows as confusion sets into your mind. “I’m sorry, please repeat that? Is this…a confession?” You ask, trying to wrap your head around his previous sentence. 
“…you could say it is,” he answers, turning to you slightly. This time, you catch sight of the pinkish hue on his cheeks.
Of all the emotions you feel, you don’t expect amusement to be your main emotion in that moment. But considering the cheesiness of his entire confession earlier…how could it not be? Before you know it, you’re bursting into guffaws. “Kun! Oh my gosh…you did not just…” you laugh over and over again until you’re wheezing. “Since when did you become so cheesy?”
“I…I don’t know! All I know is, I’ve liked — no, loved you for way too long, and I just had to tell you how I really feel, okay? I couldn’t keep quiet about it anymore,” Kun stutters, the embarrassment clearly now sinking in as he rambles. “Gosh, that came out in the worst way possible”.
You wipe away the tears of laughter that had gathered in your eyes, finding his flustered state adorable. Now that he’d told you how he felt — albeit in a cheesy and somewhat cringey manner — you found the courage to tell him you felt the same way too. “It’s okay, Kun. Yes, I’ll give you my heart this Christmas,” you answer, looking him straight in the eyes. You were well aware your cheeks were burning like a furnace, but you couldn’t care less. Thank God both of you had gotten a capsule alone, because neither of you would be able to handle the embarrassment of this whole confession in front of a bunch of strangers. 
“Wait, you mean it?” Kun asks incredulously, eyes growing wide enough to rival dinner plates. 
You say nothing, but just nod. “Yes, I love you too. Now that we know how we both feel towards each other, shall we seal the deal with…a kiss?” you suggest, lips curving into the widest smile you’ve ever smiled in your entire seventeen years of life. 
“I’d love to”. Kun replies, though somewhat shyly. 
You take his other hand in your own, and move towards him, and he does the same as both of you prepare for the kiss — but end up being met with a pile of whipped cream. In your excitement, you’d both forgotten about the cup of hot chocolate in between the two of you. “Ugh, talk about a double fail. First my cringey confession, and now this,” Kun laughs sheepishly, wiping the whipped cream off his nose. 
“I know right,” you chuckle, doing the same. “It’s alright, let’s do that again. Before this ride ends”.
With that, the distance between both of you closes. Sparks fly in your head as your lips make contact, and an unexplainable euphoria floods over you. This was the one gift that you didn’t expect to receive for Christmas, but the best one yet — nothing santa could give you would match up to this, that was for sure. Pulling away, you both gaze into each other’s eyes with lovestruck gazes. “Merry Christmas, Kun. I love you”. 
“Merry Christmas, y/n. I love you too”. 
82 notes · View notes
byunbhyunz · 1 year
Text
Roman Holiday
Tumblr media
Pairing: Kun/Reader
Genre: angst, exlovers!au
Word count: 3,182
Inspiration: Halsey – Roman Holiday
Part 5 of the Badlands Series
The hardest point of a break up isn’t when it happens. It can come even a year later too.
“I imagine the tears in your eyes The very first night I’ll sleep without you And when it happens I’ll be miles away And a few months late”
You always thought the first few months was the hardest part of your break up. Cutting off your relationship without answers to your million questions, every feeling you invested in him was done over a short phone call. You thought, no, you believed you deserved better than that. Not him, because he was always perfect for you.
Kun was caring, his thoughts revolving around you even when you were apart. He was your first serious boyfriend. He asked you out when you both were only fifteen, young and head over heels for each other, determined to make your relationship work even when he went to Korea to be a trainee, and left you alone in China. You were happy for him, even when he didn’t call as regularly as he used to in the beginning, sent him care-packages monthly with his favorite sweets and loving letters. He said he kept them under his pillow.
Everything seemed to be fine. Until it wasn’t. He called you in the afternoon, and only in six minutes he explained that he wanted to break up. Because he didn’t want it anymore. Meaning he didn’t want you anymore. He never said that, but that was the underlying message in it for you.
Even after a year, you still remembered how he sighed before he mumbled a quick ‘sorry’ and ended the call before you could even react. For the whole six minutes you didn’t say anything, just sat at the café you started to visit with your friends back in the days, and listened to his words that hit you like bullets. Your tongue felt too big for your mouth, and your vision became blurry as you stared in front of you, refusing to put your phone down from your ear. You remembered your friends hurried talk, their hands waving in front of your face, and one of them, Shihong wiped your cheeks, finally making you realize you were crying.
You thought the hardest part was getting up every day like nothing happened, and you had to forcefully push your thoughts of self-doubt away, so you would at least function until you could return to bed. Sleeping was the only time you felt a little better.
You thought your friends and family had the worst time watching you, unable to help. You were the only one who could sort out your thoughts and feelings, while you genuinely believed that it should be Kun doing it for you.
Well, after more than a year, you had to realize those months wasn’t the worst part of the break up. It was that night, more precisely that phone call you got in the middle of the night.
You were spending the weekend at your parents’ house, making them happy since they haven’t seen you for weeks because of college.
You didn’t recognize the number of the caller, but since they already woke you, you decided to answer it.
“Who is this?” you mumbled incoherently, words slurred a little.
“Y/N.”
Sitting up straight in your bed, you were wide awake. You would recognize that voice anywhere, anytime. Even after a year. Even if the last time you heard it, he was hurting you.
Kun sounded weak, breathing heavier than yours, if that was possible.
“Kun… Why did you call?”
You hated how your words came out shakily. Or the way your body trembled, your bed not feeling warm and comforting anymore. You felt alone, though your parents were sleeping in the bedroom next to yours.
Listening the way he forcefully slowed down his breathing, you did the same too.
Then he hang up, and you were left alone, once again, getting lost in questions and no answer in sight.
Shihong, your friend looked at you with narrowed eyes, not saying a word for long seconds, just staring and reading you. Or trying. You mumbled something about being tired, when she refused to look away, only leaned towards you for a better view, and tied your hair into a lazy bun.
Feeling nervous under her inspecting eyes, you averted to lock eyes with her, and focused on the menu in front of you.
“Have you decided already?” You cleared your throat. You knew she haven’t even looked at the menu at all, she was only looking at you since she arrived not long after you, but it was worth a shot.
She shrugged. Tilting her head, she said:
“You cried. What happened? And please, spare me your lies.”
Sometimes you forgot, how she always saw right through you. You were an open book for her, she could understood your thoughts even from a small sigh. Her long stare was probably for you: letting you gather yourself before she started to interrogate you. Of course, she did; she was the one who were with you during Kun’s abrupt break up and your not so surprising breakdown afterwards. She protected you ever since, as if you were a porcelain doll. In her eyes, maybe you were.
You decided best would be to say it as it happened. Curtly, only the facts.
“Kun called me last night.” Your voice wasn’t as strong as you wanted it to be. Barely above a whisper, but she definitely heard it, since her eyes grew wide with emotions. Fear, surprise and worry mixed in those brown orbs, and you felt somewhat relieved. So you weren’t overreacting it at all.
Her hand reached for yours over the table, and she barked a few words to the waitress when she tried to approach you. She turned back almost immediately upon hearing Shihong’s dry tone.
“What did he want?”
“I don’t know.” Her warm hold around your fingers made you feel better. A secure point while your mind spun way too fast for your liking. “He said my name, but when I asked why did he call, he hung up on me.”
Shihong sighed. You thought you maybe even heard her mumble a ‘thank, god’ too, but wasn’t sure about it. But even if she did, you understood her. She watched you break once because of him, and now he calls you out of nowhere, risking it to happen again. If the roles were reversed, you would worry yourself to death too. Maybe even took her phone that is laid out on the table, tapping your fingers on the dark screen. The motion didn’t go by without Shihong noticing it.
“Will you call him back?” She asked casually, but her eyes are watching you attentively.
“Of course not,” you replied a little too fast. After a short pause, you continued slower. “It’s just… He sounded so… so stressed.”
“Okay. Then will you answer it if he calls again?”
You looked down, hands dropping to your lap, as you thought about your answer. You wanted to say no, but it would be a lie. Yes wouldn’t be true either.
Shrugging your shoulders as you made eye contact with your best friend again, you opened your mouth to say something, but quickly closed your lips. She raised an eyebrow, tilting her head to the side slightly, waiting for your answer, which you couldn’t give her until Kun would call again. If he does at all.
Anyway, how come he only gives you questions and no answers? Was it legal? He was like an equation with no solution, and you were a mathematics lover student, who hated if they didn’t get a solution. You went over his words from a year ago again and again; they were as fresh in your mind as if it have happened only days ago.
You were taken back to reality by Shihong, waving her hand in front of you, concern written all over her features.
“So, will you?”
“I don’t know. I want to know why he break it off so suddenly, and why he calls me in the middle of the night even more surprisingly.”
“Ah, that bastard!” Shihong muttered under her breath, but your heard it anyway. “Can’t you just block his number, and we never talk about him again?”
You looked away, and she sighed in defeat. The waitress came back after Shihong motioned for her. You ordered a coffee with little to no sugar; you wanted to wake up since your college assignments won’t write themselves. Pulling out your laptop, you opened your folder for school works. There were a few documents that needed to be finished at least by the end of the month.
“Let’s just focus on college for now, and let that be the problem of the future,” you said as Shihong prepared her stuff for studying too. “If he calls, he calls. If he doesn’t…”
“Good. Now, tell me your thesis for the Bio assignment. I don’t even know where to start it.”
You smiled as you read it out to her. Shihong still had her eyebrows furrowed into straight lines, but this time it was more because of your biology assignment than your ex-boyfriend.
It happened exactly six days later. Kun called you once again.
You were walking to the dorms, Shihong already at your room since she finished classes early. You fiddled with your coat. An old leather one, not the fancy body-fitting kind. It was more rough, since it previously belonged to a man. It was too big for you, but it was love at first sight when you saw it in a thrift store. It was padded with a white fluffy fabric on the inside and on the collar along with the sleeves. The brown leather was worn out around the elbows and pockets and smelled sour when you first put your hands on it, but after washing it four times, the smell went away. Shihong hated the coat with every inch of her body, but admitted that it suited you.
Sticking your cold fingers out from the sleeves, you reached for your phone in your pocket, as it already buzzed it a few times.
“I’m almost there, why check on me so suddenly?” You laughed when you answered the call, assuming it was Shihong.
The silence on the other end suggested maybe you should have checked the caller’s name before answering it recklessly. You looked at the screen, and the air stuck in your lungs, unable to speak anymore.
Kun cleared his throat, and your nerves were all attuned for him. You noticed how his breathing was steady this time compared to yours. Did it only affect you?
“Sorry, I thought it was someone else. Why did you call?” You rasped out, voice shaking like a small flower in a storm.
“Okay. I was just wondering that… I’ll be back in China soon. I wondered if you wanted to meet up and have coffee or something. And you know, talk.” Well, he sounded way more casual than you expected. You felt a tug at your heart-strings, a sour taste filling your mouth.
You realized you were still standing in the middle of the sidewalk, frozen in place. Huffing loudly, you started to walk again, eyebrows furrowed in confusion as many thoughts twirled in your head. Would it be a good idea? Shouldn’t you just hang up right now?
“Are you still there?” he asked, tone soft and quiet. Yes, you wanted to say.
“Text me the details, and I’ll see if I’ll be free.”
You ended the call before he could say anything more. You were panting as if you just ran the marathon.
I need this, you thought. I need the closure.
Shihong not being happy about your announcement was a big understatement. She worked herself up as soon as you told her that you will probably meet with Kun, who will come back to the country soon. You didn’t know when or for how long, but you didn’t really care about it, if you wanted to be honest You wanted to talk to him one last time to get answers for why he broke up with you so suddenly and coldly, so you could move forward.
You could only explain that to Shihong after taking an hour to calm her down. She was a feisty girl, you knew that, but you never witnessed her break down in anger so bad, and it was a miracle that she didn’t destroy anything in your dorm.
But she insisted that she wanted to come with you to the meeting, when Kun texted you the next day. She said she’ll be far away enough for her not to hear you, but she wanted to be there. Period.
He wrote you the location of a café in your hometown and a date, asking if it would work for you. You agreed to it, then went on with your life until then as if nothing happened, doing everything to take your mind off of it.
For Shihong’s advice, you dressed up as you would for a meeting with a not so close friend: simple and casual clothes, not putting much effort into your looks. You were just going out for a few hours and talk about things, there’s no need for make up or anything special.
You pulled your hands from the pockets of your old leather jackets. Days were getting chillier, and you huffed out in annoyance as Shihong refused to pull hers out too. She said your pockets were warmer than hers, so she kept stuffing her hand in there. Right now, you gently removed it and let her first in the café.
You eyes were scanning the area long before the door closed behind you, quickly finding Kun, who was sitting possibly the furthest away from the entrance.
“I’ll be at the counter. Wave if something happens. And don’t forget to tell him that I’ll break his nose if he tries something on you.” You snorted at Shihong’s words, but the look in her eyes was sincere. She really would hit him in the face, if you asked her.
“Thanks.”
She hummed in response, then pushed you towards Kun.
He spotted you two, and saw his confusion over Shihong’s presence, but apart from an arched eyebrow, he didn’t say anything about it when you arrived to his table.
“Hi.”
“Hi.” From his tone you knew he was smiling, but you avoided eye contact with him. “I ordered a fruit tea for you too, if that’s okay.”
He pushed one of the two cups towards you that he had in front of him on the table. The smell was good, and you put your hands around the warm cup, but didn’t drink it. You were sure, at this moment, even the sweetest tea would taste awful to you. Drumming your fingers on your thigh, you muttered a thank you.
“So,” you cleared your throat, feeling awkward in your own skin. “Why are we here?”
You were surprised when you looked into Kun’s eyes for the first time, and felt nothing. No love, no hope, no warmth; only curiosity. Your hand twitched around the cup as he looked down on his lap, then back at you, a small smile playing on his lips.
“I wanted to apologize. I’m truly sorry for what I did.”
“Okay. And what did you do, Kun?”
“I… I hoped we wouldn’t go that far,” he muttered quietly. You glanced at Shihong, who was watching you two intently. You shook your head at her when she cocked an eyebrow.
“You went to Korea to become a trainee. Said that we could make a long distance relationship work. And I thought we did so. Then you called me, said you want to break up and without explanation, you ended it. And now, you call me in the middle of the night, not saying anything, then call me again asking to meet. I need you to tell me what all of this was about, so I can finally move forward.”
“Okay,” he sighed. “The company asked all of us to broke off any kind of romantic relationship we might had. I thought it would be easier to do it like this. As if I was removing a bandage; suddenly and in one go.”
“So you broke my heart out of nowhere and didn’t think I deserved and explanation.” You concluded his train of thought, and you couldn’t even get angry at him anymore. He did what he was asked to do, and chose a bad way to do it. It was already done, and now you knew why he did it.
“I was in pain too. Do you think it was easy for me to do that?” He said in a low tone, eyes fixated on your face. Honestly, you did think he had it easy. If not, he would have called or told you why he broke up with you. “I wanted to take everything I said back, or just go back in time to when we were happy and I wasn’t in a different country.”
“You chose that life for yourself, Kun. So why are you actually here?”
This time he was the one avoiding eye contact. He rather stared at Shihong than looked in your eyes while telling you the truth behind the reason of your meeting.
“I wanted to ask you to never talk about me. Please. I will be debuting in a month, and they plan to make me debut in China too. If a word comes out about my dating life from the past, or someone says bad things about me, it can be all ruined.”
You scoffed. Of course, he only wanted to meet up to make sure you won’t gossip about him publicly. Your heart hurt a little at that. It wasn’t like Kun. This whole conversation felt more like a business meeting than old lovers seeing each other for the first time in a year or more so. Couldn’t help, but you hated it. It isn’t how it is supposed to go. Not after everything.
“Do you regret it?” Your voice was tiny, and you feared and hoped he heard it. “The break up, I mean. You said they asked you to do it. Do you regret it?”
His hand reached out for yours, pulling it away from the warm cup and holding gently. The look in his eyes was sincere, intimate.
“I do. We planned to be together forever, and love can’t just disappear because someone wants it to.”
“Look where it got us,” you mumbled.
Sharply inhaling, you pulled your hand away. Glancing at the untouched tea, you swallowed before standing up. You got your answers, so why stay longer and risk another heartbreak? His words already pushed you into a nostalgic feeling, making you wish for going back to those easier times, when it was just you, him and your love. And that was enough.
But those times are over, you thought. And there’s no need for lingering about what could have happened if…
“I won’t talk about you, so you don’t have to worry about it. And I’m really wishing the best for you, but just, please… don’t call me again, Kun.”
21 notes · View notes
jungwooisms · 2 years
Text
hwarang | kun
Tumblr media
ACT III - THE END
pairing: qian kun x female!reader genre: historical au, fluff, angst, supernatural members: moon taeil, lee taeyong, nakamoto yuta, li yongqin (ten), jeong jaehyun, wong yukhei (lucas),  xiao dejun (xiaojun), wong kunhang (hendery), huang renjun, na jaemin, lee donghyuck (haechan), osaki shotaro,  warnings: crass humor and language, blood, violence, injuries, alcohol, major character death, minor character death, war, historical inaccuracies for the sake of plot progression word count: 43.2k it is important to read the prologue & act i & act ii first to understand the context of this! i can’t link it here but it’s on my masterlist!
June 7, 665 – Seonggwa Inn, Ungjin, Kingdom of Silla By the time that the Hwarang finish following King Munmu of Silla to Ungjin, they find themselves holed up in Seonggwa Inn, a relatively spacious lodging, as their king speaks of a treaty between his kingdom and the Tang. With each day, the Hwarang hope that the potential of invading Goguryeo due to their aiding and abetting with the now quelled Baekje forces becomes a reality.
Silla hadn’t lost the conflict with Baekje, without the aid of the Tang the story would be entirely different though. Yet, with their aid, it had begun to expose several rifts in both the Crown and the Hwarang in favor for or against the additional help.
 The recent attack on Taeil’s life, as well as Yongqin’s illness, has confined both of them to staying with Doctor Namekawa Yasuo to treat them. So, while they don’t remain at the newest Hwarang headquarters, they still reside within Ungjin. Although present in spirit, some of the men have begun to notice their rather large absences…
“He’s probably just run off to not have to deal with this shit,” one of the warriors guffaws at the thought of Taeil not returning. A few others around him return the sentiment.
“He’d never do that,” a serious voice responds, you turn to see Jeno looking angrily at the group, “All of you are complaining instead of focusing on the work we have ahead of us.”
Normally such insubordination from a lower wang-do was met with harsh consequences, yet things had changed since coming to Ungjin.
“You all have too much to talk about, go sharpen your swords or train,” Yukhei adds to Jeno’s proclamation.
With grumbled acceptance, several of the Hwarang run off.
“I can see where they’re coming from… They’re tired, I suppose,” Jaehyun huffs out, shaking his head as he watches the other scurry away. “We’ve been sitting here without orders for weeks.”
“True, but I mean… What else are we going to do while Munmu’s off kissing up to the Tang?” Yukhei frowns, moving his head from side to side to crack his joints.
“Don’t give me that bullshit,” Jaehyun retorts, “These men were ready to die for him not too long ago, I’m pretty sure they just want to run out the loyalists and Goguryeo soldiers just like we do.”
“So…” Jeno murmurs, “What’s going to happen now?
“Taeil’s stuck in bed. Even if we wanted to run after the traitors, we’re not going to be able to touch them if we leave too late,” Yukhei sighs, his shoulders slumping. “Future’s looking pretty dark if we’re looking north… Maybe we oughta head to Jinro-dong again…”
“Jinro-dong?” Jaehyun’s brow furrows at the mention of the nightlife district, “Really? In a time like this?”
“Of course you idiot,” Yukhei scoffs, “Times like this are when we need to party hard! Gotta lift our spirits somehow!”
“Huh,” Sungchan, who’d been standing in the courtyard along you all quietly, asks, “Does anyone know where Yuta is? I haven’t seen him around lately…”
“He’s off helping Namekawa,” Jaehyun explains, “We still have a lot of injured men after the last fight.”
You frown, not saying anything. Memories of the peaceful times back in Seorabeol are like a candle flickering in the wind, one breath away from turning it all into smoke. Sometimes you have to ask yourself if they really had happened at all.
June 18, 665 – Ungjin, Kingdom of Silla When you hear footsteps walking up the entranceway of the inn, you think it’s just another Hwarang returning from town until…
“Hello,” a soft voice greets, “It’s been a while.”
“Oh,” Your eyes widen upon looking up from your work and finding Kim Jungwoo standing before you. “Jungwoo… What brings you here?”
“I've come to discuss a few important matters with Kun, would you mind taking me to him?” He asks as his shoe slowly taps at the gravelly rocks underfoot.
Sometime after you lead him to the Commander’s quarters, murmurs of conversation suddenly become exclamation.
“Are you sure?!” Kun says angrily as you peer into the room.
“Yes,” Jungwoo nods solemnly, eyes trained on the floor, “Supposedly, an urgent matter has arisen, meaning he cannot meet with us.”
“… No.” Kun frowns as he shakes his head, “We need to talk to him. I don’t care how. If we don’t, we’re stuck here. I’ll go.” And with that, he storms towards you, toward the exit. He doesn’t acknowledge you as he goes, only looking as pensive as ever as he leaves the compound.
“Did something happen?” You ask Jungwoo, who’s gaze had risen to watch the Hwarang leave.  
“Kun had planned to meet with a member of the king’s council today, but I’d been informed that the man hadn’t planned on showing up, so I came to notify him.” Jungwoo explains quickly.
The Commander has been attempting to gather council support to try and speed up the process of invasion, however their unwillingness to try and sway the king’s favor has led to them not entertaining Kun’s initiative means.
“Do you think they’re just waiting until Tang makes a call?” You question timidly.
“Whatever the case, the King has instructed me to not make any rash decisions,” Jungwoo hums, “Honestly, in times like these, I am a little envious of Kun as he can do as he pleases… Anyway, I will be leaving now. Please send my regards to everyone.”
“Oh, of course!” You say as you begin to walk with him towards the entrance. “I’m sorry that I couldn’t offer you more courtesy while you were here.”
Shortly after Jungwoo leaves the inn, a familiar figure approaches you to ask a question.
“Is the Commander inside?” Shotaro says as you stop outside the front door.
“Ah,” you shake your head, “You’ve just missed him, he’s stepped out for the time being… Did you have business with him?”
Shotaro’s eyebrows raise in surprise, “Wow, ever since we’ve gotten here, he’s been working non-stop.
“I know… I seriously wonder how he finds the time to sleep, if at all.” As far as you know, Kun should be suffering in agonizing pain during the daytime due to his condition as a Fury. However, seeing him work as tirelessly as he does, one would have no clue of his affliction at all.
“Are you okay, Shotaro? You look a bit more gaunt than usual…”
“Ah… Well… Ever since Minhyung passed away, I’ve had a lot more work to do.” Shotaro smiles sadly, “But he left it to me, and I’ll be damned if I dishonor his memory by messing it up. And seeing how far the Commander’s pushing himself for us, it wouldn’t feel right if I just sat around here all day, you know?”
“I see…” You know exactly how he feels, yet he’s actually in a position to contribute. Unlike Shotaro, there is nothing you can do for Kun, even though you yearn to be involved and do whatever you can to help.
“Well,” Shotaro nods briefly, “I’ve got plenty more to do, so I’ll be on my way.”
“Of course, please be careful.”
“By the way,” he’d begun walking before stopping himself, “There’s been a lot of killers on the street recently, looking to test their swords on a living body. Don’t travel alone, okay?”
Later that night, you’re waiting in the empty common room for the captains to return, sitting idly as your fingers tap atop the table you’re seated at when Na Jaemin comes strolling into the room.
“Evening!” He greets cheerily, moving to come over and sit beside you.
“Hey Jaemin,” you say politely, peering around him to see if anyone else has followed in behind him. “Where’s everyone else?”
“Yukhei and Jaehyun took the men to Jinro-dong, and, if you can believe it, they left me behind to house-sit.” He sighs out, resting his head on his chin, “I’m not their maid, you know. They can’t keep giving me this kind of bitch work… Well, I guess it’s nice that they’re acting like usual. To me, I mean. Like nothing ever changed.” His laugh sounds small in the empty hall.
“That reminds me, do you know where Taeyong is?” You tilt your head inquisitively as you ask. “Did he go out somewhere?”
“Yeah,” Jaemin sits up, nodding his head, “He went out on patrol.”
“Patrol?” You furrow your brow, “But we’re not in Seorabeol any more… No one’s asked us to keep peace in Ungjin…”
His face grows solemn, as if he’s quietly searching for words. “… He’s been acting weird lately. Like, today, soon as the sun went down, he said he was going on patrol. I asked if he wanted me to go with him but he said he’d be just fine on his own.”
“I’ve heard that there’s been a lot of killings at night recently, maybe he’s going out to try to learn about who or what’s causing it?” Taeyong may not have the same authority here that they had in Seorabeol, but they do still work for the Crown. Perhaps Taeyong’s just trying to protect Ungjin, regardless if he was asked to or not.
“…Well, if that’s the deal, then good.” Jaemin doesn’t sound fully convinced.
Just then, the door opens once more and Kun comes inside quietly.
“Good evening, Commander,” you greet him with a small smile.
“You’re still up?” His face is pale, but his tone is sharp. As you watch him, you can see that it looks as if he’s struggling to stand. He shakes slightly as he moves, and you get the feeling that if he were to let his concentration slip, he’d just simply collapse on the floor in front of you.
“Is there anything I can do to help?” You already know his answer, but you can’t help but to ask.
“No,” he shakes his head, “Just stay put, and stop thinking about that.”
Even though everyone else is working themselves thin, barely sleeping or eating, all you can do is sit around, useless.
“Hey… Don’t give me that look,” he says, noting your expression.
“I’m sorry!” You say quickly, only realizing after you’d spoken that you’ve only made things worse. And apologizing makes you sound all the more miserable.
Kun nearly chuckles, “You don’t need to worry about us. Just… go make some tea, alright? Your tea isn’t that bad, I guess.”
“Okay!” You rise to your feet, “I’ll be right back.” Your feet carry you to the kitchen, a slight smile curving along your lips.
You return to the common room some minutes later, a tray with three cups atop it, along with the hot teapot steaming into the night.
“I couldn’t find any yakgwa to go with it… but I was able to sneak a few of Taeil’s old snacks…” You say as you set the tray atop the table.
“It’s alright,” Kun sighs, now sitting down at the table. “I have to get back to work as soon as I drink this anyway.”
“Are you sure you’re going to be alright?” Jaemin frowns worriedly, “You’re a Fury now. You should be sleeping during the day and working at night.”
Kun doesn’t answer, just chooses to sip at his tea for a long drawn-out moment. “When we were leaving Daegaya, Taeil said something to me. He said that if he were the King, even if he only had two hundred men, he would continue to push forward for the legacy of our Kingdom, and if he failed? Gut himself like an honorable warrior.” He huffs out a short laugh, “Now he’s stuck in bed, shot in the shoulder. He’d die for any one of us, and we all know it. Sure, I feel like shit, but that doesn’t mean I get to rest.”
The prospect of handing over a fully-functioning Hwarang back to his friend brings a gleam to his eyes. If the rest of the men are worried because their leader has been wounded by a coward's arrow… Kun is buoyed by the fact that Taeil is still alive, and that he has the courage to do what other leaders will not. He finishes his tea quickly, returning to his room with only perfunctory thanks.
Yesterday, his light had stayed on late into the night. Today, you’re sure, will likely be no different.
“I’ve got an anxious feeling about what’s ahead…” Jaemin says after Kun’s left, “He’s a Fury, but it doesn’t look as if he’s started to feel the bloodlust yet.”
“Bloodlust?”
“When you become a Fury… Something happens to you and, well, sometimes you really, really want to drink blood. Like, you need to,” he explains slowly, “It hurts, and not like how it hurts when Jeong shoves a practice sword into your gut. You want to die, just because that’ll make the pain stop.”
Your mouth hangs open. Kun already looks terrible, if unbearable pain is suddenly added to his already long list of burdens… “Is there any way to do anything about it?”
“Well, if you drink some blood, then it goes away almost immediately, but… only for a while.” Jaemin sighs out, “And the longer you go, the more painful it gets. At first you only need a little blood to feel better, but after a while you need more. And pretty soon you’ll need a whole lot before you feel better again.”
You sit there at a loss for words. Furies truly do seem like the monsters from legends.
“What about you, Jaemin? Are you…?”
“Come on,” he closes his eyes, unable to look at you, “You can’t ask me that.” After this, he makes some manner of excuse and shoots up. He departs from the common room quietly, leaving you alone with your thoughts of the commander. Is he really okay?
Lost in thoughts, you stumble upon something—your father had done research on the Furies. Perhaps he’d left something useful behind at your home… or the one that used to be yours. It’s already too late to visit… And finding an escort will be troublesome enough…
June 25, 665 – Toehwa-hyeon, Kingdom of Silla The following day, you leave a neatly written note behind at the inn for anyone who may be curious as to where you’re headed. It had only taken you a week, maybe less, to return to your home on the main roads… And it should take about that time to return.
It seems as if no one’s visited the home in several years, everything covered in a thick layer of dust. You hum to yourself, perusing the shelves and drawers for anything denoting your father’s research on the Furies. Hands brushing off a few books, you scan their contents only for them to reveal some barely legible scribbles that would take you forever to decipher.
‘No…’ You shake your head, this is the least you can do for the Hwarang.
After searching through several more books, you sit on the floor, sighing heavily as your eyes fall to the unkempt floor. Have you been foolish enough to think that this would work? That waltzing in, finding these secret documents and solving the Hwarang’s plague would be easy?
You frown, needing to rid these thoughts. So, you continue to flip through all the books and papers you can lay your hands on. As you skim through a large sheaf of papers a small stak falls onto the floor, dust flying upwards as it lands. It appears to be… some kind of formula?
“Huh?” You murmur, moving to place down the stack in your hands, reaching for the papers at your feet. Studying it, you realize what you’ve found. It details a mismade concoction your father had made after working with the Hwarang that could stop Furies’ bloodlust for a time. Maybe you’ve found something useful after all?
July 1st, 665 – Ungjin, Kingdom of Silla You arrive in Ungjin just as the sun settles beyond the western horizon, and as you enter the Hwarang’s compound, you’re met with Jaemin and Taeyong. Their backs turned to you, you call out to them to make sure they can hear you.
“You’re back?” His brow raises inquisitively, as if he’d not known if you were coming back. “It’s dangerous out there, you know. You shouldn’t be out at night all by yourself.”
“I meant to come back earlier… The roads were… I lost track of time, is all,” You say quickly, trying to change the subject. “Anyway! I have something for you!”
You reach into your bag, procuring the medicine you were able to make from your father’s old supplies.
“What’s this?” Taeyong questions as he looks over the powdery substance.
“It’s medicine to suppress bloodlust! I went back home and found instructions on how to make it,” you nod enthusiastically, “It should make the pain go away, at least for a little while.
His gaze looks from the medicine to you, biting his lip coyly before looking into your eyes, “Thank you, but no. Your gesture is certainly appreciated, but it isn’t needed.”
“Huh?” You say, unable to stop the exclamation from leaving you, “Wait, but… without it…”
“You are not one of us, so to you the bloodlust may seem odd, or wrong.” He gingerly hands the powder back to you, “However, the more one tries to suppress it, the greater the pain becomes. This medicine would be a minor reprieve… nothing more.” Before you can say anything else, he nods to you, “Excuse me. I must leave for patrol. Good night.”
You wonder what he’s to do about his bloodlust without the medicine as you watch him walk briskly into the night. To not only acknowledge but accept this insatiable craving as a part of one’s life seems… beyond you. It’s now that you remember Seulgi’s warning of the Hwarang’s Furies murdering people on the streets to test their strength… Had they been feeding off of innocent lives?
“I’ll take that,” Jaemin says, looking down at the medicine.
“Oh!” You nod, handing it to him, “Of course.” He stuffs it into his pocket before staring at where Taeyong had just disappeared. “I’m going on patrol with him. If he… does anything weird, I’ll stop him. So don’t worry, alright?”
“Alright,” you nod quickly, “I’m counting on you, Jaemin… Is the Commander inside?”
“Yeah,” the Hwarang nods, “he came back earlier this evening, but he locked himself in his room. Not a peep from him since.”
“Oh…” You hum, “I’m going to check on him then.”
Jaemin and you say your quick goodbyes, and you make your way inside of the inn towards Kun’s room. You hope the wave of anxiety you feel is a needless one, but you have a very bad feeling as you call out to him from behind the door of his room.
A knock, “Are you in there? I have something for you…”
Nothing. “You’re about to turn away, assuming that he’s asleep when—
Kun cries out in pain, sounding as if he’s struggling for air.
“Commander—I’m coming in!” You blurt out, opening the door and running inside quickly.
Kun lays bent over his desk at the back of the room, sweat pouring down his face as his teeth squeak horribly as he grits them. His hair lay a stark white, his eyes, when he opens them to look at you, are a harsh crimson.
“Are you okay?!” You say as you rush to his side.
“You idiot.” He groans, “Just shut up.”
“But—”
“This’ll pass… any time now… Don’t get all worked up over nothing! Leave it.” He wraps his arms around his shoulders and squeezes until his knuckles turn white as he glances up at you. His breath comes out in pants as he shivers violently.
It’s Kun’s personality to refuse any show of pain, or any emotion at all—or at least to show as little as possible. For him to be like this…The pain must be unimaginable. Is this the bloodlust that Jaemin spoke of?
You pause, knowing that he needs blood but that’s… A frown as you think of the medicine, but again, Taeyong had said it was a temporary solution. Should you give him your blood, then?
There isn’t any time to think of this any longer. It’s not the best plan, perhaps, but you cannot bear to see him in pain any longer. Besides, this is one way that you can help.
Kun shakes fiercely as you gaze upon him in horror. Saying nothing, you draw the blade at your waist.
“What the hell are you—?!” Kun’s eyes go wide as you slide your finger along the edge of the blade, a bead of thick blood forming over the cut.
“Please drink my blood,” you offer your hand to him, “It’ll make you feel better, right?”
“I can’t do that!” He refutes, his clothes drenched in sweat as he shakes like a leaf in the wind. If he had the strength you’re sure he’d try to knock your hand away.
“Don’t worry about me,” you insist, unable to watch him suffer any longer, “Please…”
Though he’s trying to resist, his eyes are locked on your finger, to the blood dripping to the floor. He balls his fist tightly, but he cannot resist.
“You’re an idiot,” he murmurs, reaching out for your hand, “A girl shouldn’t hurt herself for a man’s sake…” Then, he brings your fingers to his lips, you wince slightly as you feel the soft caress of his tongue on your cut. Then, the gentle pressure of his teeth and lips as he sucks, drawing a few more drops out and into his mouth.
“I’ll be fine,” you promise, “I’m a Demon. I heal quickly.”
“Doesn’t matter,” he frowns, “Demon or not, you’re still a girl.” By now, his breathing has already begun to calm itself; through his hand on your wrist, you can feel him stop shaking as well. A few moments later, his grasp on your wrist loosens and he slips his hand away.
The cut on your finger has already healed. The split in the flesh heals before your very eyes as you stand there quietly, Kun wincing.
“I’m sorry for being so forward…” You apologize, returning your hand to your side.
Kun takes a quiet breath and shakes his head, a sense of calm seems to emerge from him, “This isn’t the time to be pretending that I’m fine. I know that. If I want to make sure that Taeil succeeds, then I don’t have a choice. I have to become a monster.”
Absently, you move your fingers to the wrist he’d taken when he drank your blood. A peculiar feeling lingers on the surface of your skin, almost as if you can still feel his warmth there.
September 10th, 665 – Ungjin, Kingdom of Silla Even after the events of that fateful night, Kun had pushed himself just as hard as he had before; he still continues to visit the council members whenever he can find the time. Eventually, that work does pay off, and he’s found himself in several meetings with the King’s closest men.
Between his demanding schedule and Fury-related difficulties, you know he must be miserable, but you know that he’s determined to give Taeil his fight. This alone seems to drive him forward.
It’s a cool evening when the doors of the compound open and Moon Taeil walks confidently into the Hwarang’s main hall.
“I apologize for worrying you all,” he smiles, scratching the back of his head.
“Welcome back!” Both Sungchan and Jeno say excitedly, “We’re happy you’re back with us.”
“You flatter me,” Taeil laughs, “But in all seriousness… Thank you. I am truly grateful that I am able to join you all again.” His eyes scan the room of men, nodding as he does, “I’m sure you’re all wondering what’s next. First, we’ll head to Hanseong. We’ve been ordered to take the city.”
Prior to this, you’d heard that Taeil has almost been promoted to a position outside of the Hwarang, while Kun has basically taken over Taeil's old role as Chief.
It’s a momentous honor to have been bestowed, although you can see that some of the men are hesitant to find cause for celebration.
“Hey, Moon,” Yukhei says from his seated position, “Who came up with the idea of us sieging Hanseong?”
“Kim Yong, why?” Taeil looks at him quizzically, “Is that a problem?”
“This guy is rumored to be a pacifist,” Yukhei pushes, “Why does he want us to go to war?”
“Besides,” Jaehyun adds, “I’ve heard that the King is perfectly willing to just go along with whatever the Tang forces want. You don’t think Kim feels the same way?”
Taeil crosses his arms before he speaks, “Wong, Jeong, these are direct orders from the King’s council. It’s true that the King is following the influence of the Tang, but to be fair, he owes them a great amount of debt. However, if we can take Hanseong, then perhaps he’ll see that he won’t need to rely on their aid as much as we drive out Goguryeo. This isn’t just a matter of winning and losing; the men in charge are saying that we are a force skilled and dedicated enough to capture Hanseong.” His voice sharp, domineering, “Isn’t our duty as warriors, then, to give all we can to this fight? Don’t you agree, Yukhei?”
“You’re going to gloss over it like that?” Yukhei scoffs, “I’m a captain of the Hwarang, but I’m not your retainer.”
Looking upset, Taeil moves to speak before Jaehyun interjects, “Yuta… what’s your take on all of this?”
“I will do whatever is commanded of me.” He says simply.
All eyes turn to Kun, who’s been observing the amicable commotion before him quietly, “We should round up more men if we’re to go to war. If we do well in Hanseong, I’m sure the Crown will send us even more men. As far as Kim goes… Doesn’t matter how much he hates war, I’m sure he knows that you cannot avoid it.” His head shakes as he sighs out, “I mean, if he refuses Tang influence at this point, what’s the point of staking out Goguryeo? What’s the point in seeking out revenge?”
“I guess you have a point,” when Kun had put it that way, it seems like Yukhei has nothing more to oppose.
“Shall we head out for the mountains near Hanseong and prepare for night raids?” Taeyong asks.
“The Fury Corps aren’t going this time,” Kun states, “You’re staying here.” 
“Why?” Taeyong frowns.
“If the King does send us reinforcements, I can’t afford to let them see you.” Kun adamantly shakes his head, “There’s going to be significantly more men in Hanseong, you’ll get spotted. Then what’ll be the point of having a secret division?”
“But—!” Taeyong begins to retort until Jaemin stops him.
“The war’s only just begun… We shouldn’t be in a rush.”
You see Kun and Jaemin exchange a quick look. They must have realized how Taeyong would react and spoke of this beforehand. To you, at least, there seems to be a silent agreement.
“Alright then, everyone return to your rooms. We have some time before we leave so make sure you get your affairs in order,” Taeil stands as he addresses the room.
And that’s that. The captains soon leave for their stations, seeking to brief their men and prepare for battle. Only Kun remains behind, mumbling something to himself as he sifts through the massive stacks of paper and maps before him.
“Are you sure it’ll be okay?” You ask timidly as you approach him.
“Hm?” He glances up to you, “What will be okay?”
“This war… It’s not going to just be one battle, is it?” You frown, “Wouldn’t it have been better to take the Fury Corps along?”
“Oh.” He sighs, “That.” The map in hand set down, he glances at it before looking back to you, “Remember what that Sooyoung girl, or whatever her name was, warned us about the Furies killing people?”
“Yes…”
“Well. I think it might’ve been Taeyong.” He says shortly as your mouth flies open.
“What?!”
“The Fury Corps is our ace in the hole,” he continues, ignoring your short outburst, “but I can’t have them murdering people in the streets to satisfy their bloodlust. During the fight in Seorabeol they used silver arrowheads on the Furies, which made them essentially useless. Until we can figure out how to counteract the silver problem, I need to have Taeyong stay here. Jaemin will… keep an eye on him. We also may need them to collect arms for a counterattack.”
A counterattack… Does that mean Kun is planning for a possible loss in Hanseong?
“This next fight is going to be a big one. We probably shouldn’t take you, but… If I leave you here, Donghyuck might decide to try and steal you away again. So, I’m taking you with us, but you need to watch yourself and stay out of trouble.”
With the nervous knot slowly forming in your stomach, you nod, “Okay…”
October 31st, 665 – Ungjin, Kingdom of Silla Today, the Hwarang leave for Hanseong. And as you enter the common room, you take note of the different outfits the men have donned.
“You’re up early,” Yukhei muses, beckoning you over.
“Your clothes…” Your brow furrows at him, “Are you really Yukhei?! What are you wearing?”
“The Commander ordered us to dress in Tang clothing when going into battle from now on,” Yuta explains as you look over his new uniform as well.
You look at the Commander, dressed predominately in black, his new outfit giving him an elegant look. It suits him well, he looks almost as handsome as an actor. You can’t help but stand there and admire him for a moment.
“Something wrong?” Kun asks as he notes your prolonged gaze, “…Do you think I’m wearing it wrong?”
“Hm? Oh. No. No, definitely not.”
He laughs, “You’re strange.”
“Hm,” you shake your head and your eyes fall on Taeil, “Why aren’t you wearing Tang clothes?”
“They’re just so… heavy.” Taeil explains, “I can’t stand how the shoes are made either. I wouldn’t feel like a real warrior dressed like that. I suppose I’m being childish, but that’s my right.”
“You’re fine,” Kun smiles, “It’s not like you’ll be out on the front lines. You just have to act dignified in front of the men. Your presence alone is enough to inspire everyone.”
“You’re going to make me blush,” Taeil sounds flustered before speaking to the men, “Well, let’s go then! To Hanseong!”
November 11th, 665 – The Road North, Kingdom of Silla/Goguryeo And so, the Hwarang are headed north. During the journey, Taeil splits from the main group to visit his hometown somewhere east of the border. And after several days of his absence, the men begin to worry.
“Where is he?” Yukhei notes as the men stop along a rocky path, his eyes looking up the walkway and behind to where they’d come.
“It seems as if the Chief hasn’t caught up with us yet…” Jeno trails off, a frown of worry present on his lips.
“Still? How long is he going to sit around that inn getting drunk?” Yukhei says impatiently.
“Well, he probably hasn’t been home in a while,” Jaehyun snorts, “Probably wants to show off how successful he’s been. Not to mention he probably wants to visit his wife and daughter. He hasn’t seen them in a long time.”
“Show off, huh?” Yukhei shakes his head, “We’re marching to war. You really think this is the time for that shit?”
“He’s gone to see if the rumors of people wanting to join us were true, if they are, he needs to assess their abilities,” Kun interjects. “What better way to get to know new soldiers than by sharing a drink with them?”
“You have a point… but…”
Kun’s eyes narrow and Yukhei looks unsatisfied as the commander mutters to himself, “If we had gotten enough men before we left, then Taeil wouldn’t be out there right now.” His words cut the air like a knife.
The Hwarang had made a name for themselves in Seorabeol, but their notoriety can only carry them so far. You no longer have the luxury of interviewing potential recruits and taking the best ones; now, you need to offer incentives of alcohol and money to attract them. You know Kun would have rather cut off his own arm than stoop this low, but he has no choice.
From down the path, you can see Yuta rearing towards the group atop his horse, stopping shortly before you and leaping off, “Commander, I have something to report—The enemy has called reinforcements to Hanseong.”
“What? How did they know we were coming…” Kun frowns, “We’ve got to relay this to Taeil as soon as possible.”
November 14th, 665 – Outside of Hanseong, Kingdom of Goguryeo It’s some time before the Chief receives the message and returns to the main group of Hwarang. Long enough for the news of the enemy threat to spread and causation for some to panic. Nearly fifteen hundred of the men you’d left Ungjin with desert, reducing your forces to a mere two thousand. Jaehyun and Yukhei seem only more cautious at this, both advising retreat. But Taeil decides that the Hwarang will form up for battle and fight until the bitter end.
Now that the Crown had given him direct orders, he said that there cannot be any hesitance.
“I’ll call in reinforcements from Ungjin,” Kun frowns, “One thing for sure is… We cannot afford to lose this. Make that damn clear to the reinforcements, we can’t afford to have any more deserters.”
“Of course,” Yuta nods, turning and jogging off to join the rest of the men.
After giving his directions to the last of his men, Kun looks to you.
“Go back to Ungjin with someone. This place will turn into a battlefield soon enough, and you should be somewhere safe.” The tone in his voice shows no room for you to question his call.
“I’ll stay here…” You eventually conclude, “I can’t run away to somewhere safe while everyone else is off fighting. I’ll stay here to watch over the Chief until you get back.”
Kun grimaces, “How? You can’t swing a sword to save your life, and I don’t think you’ve got the guts to kill a man. You’re not a soldier.” You’d expected him to say as much, but you’re not going to back down easily.
“It’s true that I’m not very good with a sword, but… I can still be his shield. Any small wounds I sustain will heal quickly enough.”
“Why are you doing this? No one’s asked you to,” Kun stares at you, seeing that your resolve isn’t shaken.
“I know I may be out of line when I say this, but I know that we can’t lose him. Not now.” You insist, “I’m sick and tired of always being protected, I want to help!” You’ve been with them long enough now to see how much Taeil means to Kun and the rest of the Hwarang. If you go back to Ungjin and Taeil dies… Just thinking of it makes a cold chill crawl up your spine.
Kun chews his lip thoughtfully for a moment, and his hard, piercing gaze never seems to drift away from your face. Refusing to break his concentration for a long moment, he sighs.
“If you’re really that serious about this, then I’ve got an order for you,” he crosses his arms, “As a member of the Hwarang.”
“What…?” Your eyebrows shoot up.
“You’re going to guard Taeil personally. Stay by his side and give him anything he asks for.” After awaiting your baffled response he continues, “…And?”
“Yes! Sir!” Without thinking, you straighten up and nod vigorously.
“I will protect him even if it means my li—” Before you can finish, Kum cuts you off with a sharp expression.
“There’s one condition. You can’t die.” That isn’t the sort of thing you’d expect him to say. ‘Be careful’, maybe, but not ‘You can’t die’. “And don’t do anything stupid, like being his shield, or whatever bullshit you were saying. I am not ordering you to die.” He gives you one last pointed look before turning to gaze bitterly at the walls of Hanseong in the distance.
“If our enemy this time turns out to be a bunch of amateurs who’re just hoping to kiss some ass with their king, we might have a chance,” he muses. “If it’s not… That’ll be a different story. I’ll try and get back as fast as I can, but if something happens before I do, I’m counting on you and Yuta to make sure Taeil gets away clean.” Kun then looks back to you, “And none of this shield shit. You escape with him. Die, and I’ll make sure you regret it. Understood?”
You feel a cold sweat on your  back as his words sink their way into your skin. You’d seen others fight for their lives in battle many times, but this is the first that you’d actually be joining. Will you really be able to protect Taeil? Will it even be possible to evade your enemies, let Taeil escape and survive?
Perhaps Kun notices your sudden fear as he lets out a short, bitter laugh, “Hey. Take out your sword.”
“Huh?” You ask, stunned for a moment by the strangeness of his request before complying and unsheathing your blade from its scabbard.
Kun then moves to swiftly remove his from his hip, taking his steel and tapping it against your own. The clear tone they make draws goosebumps from your arms.
“The third rule of O Gye is to trust your friends and treat them sincerely…”
“O- Oh…” You furrow your brow. The O Gye is the set of principles that the Hwarang have followed since their inception, why is he…
“You’re a Hwarang now… Well,” he chuckles, “I suppose you’d be a Wonhwa, wouldn’t you? Regardless, this is proof.”
“Proof of what?” You ask as he smiles gently at you.
“That I’ll come back, that you can trust that I will return and that I can trust that you’ll survive too.” He lowers his blade, slipping it back into its sheath, “So you believe me, and you wait. And don’t die.” His words are confident, and listening to him, you feel as if they somehow have bolstered your spirit tenfold.
As someone who prides himself on being a Hwarang, you know these words, the O Gye, mean a great deal to him. You have to follow through, you can’t break this newly formed promise with him.
“I understand,” you nod, “I will protect the Chief and I will survive.”
November 27th, 665 – Outside of Hanseong, Kingdom of Goguryeo Slowly, the Hwarang find themselves driven into a stalemate. Taeil had done his best to try and tell the men they were to slowly siege the city, to draw them out and have them surrender on their own terms to protect the area around Hanseong from becoming bloodied with battle. Unfortunately, one of the new recruits had cried out that he was a Hwarang and slain a Goguryeo soldier.
That was the spark that set the pile ablaze. The bulk of the opponent’s forces turned out to be men who’d come from the hardened battle lines of Goguyeo’s northern fronts, meaning they’d been in near constant battle with the Tang for years. It quickly becomes stalemated as the days progress. Taeil has no choice now but to retreat until forces from Ungjin arrive.
“We have to go!” You cry out as Taeil emerges from his tent, “If we don’t, you’ll be killed if Goguryeo breaks through our lines!”
“My men are still fighting out there!” He states firmly, “I cannot run away and leave them, I will not leave them behind!”
“Even if we lose this battle now, we have reinforcements coming later, and as long as you’re safe, there’s still hope for the Hwarang—” You insist as you walk with him, “We can regroup and fight back later!” You reach for his hand, pulling him as hard as you can toward the path away from the city.
Taeil looks across the battlefield at his men, hopelessly entrenched in lines that will never break or push through. The smell of death from both allied and enemy corpses stings your noses. Looking at him, you can see tears well up in the corners of his eyes. He lowers his gaze, murmuring something as Yuta returns from the front lines.
Yuta’s steely expression is colored by streaks of mud and grit from the battlefield, “Are you prepared to leave?” He notes the bags around your and Taeil’s backs, “Good. Let’s go.”
“Let’s go quickly…” You say, urging Taeil forward.
“Right…” He sighs out and begins to walk once more.
Running into the nearby forest, you escape into it under the cover of the quickly encroaching night.
“We’ll be in Silla territory soo,” you say as you look at Taeil, “Hang in there.”
“Right…” He sighs once more.
Perhaps it’s because you’ve never seen him lose before, but this is the first time you’ve seen Taeil so… drained.
“I’m sorry for being so, um, forward…” He eventually says, “I let so many of my men die…”
“You can’t beat yourself up over that now.” You say, trying to rid him of the thought, “Like the Commander said, we just don’t have what it takes to beat them right now.” Your words don’t seem to reach him as he continues to stare numbly beyond you.
“Perhaps if someone else were Chief… they might still be alive…”
“Taeil…” You let his name slip from your lips, forgetting the last time you’d referred to him by his name, not his family’s.
“Who’s there?”  Before you’re able to console him any more, you hear a voice coming from the brush that sounds unfamiliar to you. Peeking out, you catch the sight of a Goguryeo soldier and freeze immediately. “I know you heard me.”
Yuta, who’d been staring intently out to where the soldier stands, murmurs, “I’ll buy you some time. Take the Chief and escape.”
Nodding quickly, you and Taeil tiptoe away through the brush, trying your best not to make any noise. Just as soon as you’re able to get Taeil moving at a decent pace, a shadow leaps out before you, barring your way forward.
“I had a feeling you might be here…” The figure of Xiao Dejun murmurs before you. Instinctively, you step backwards, unease writhing in your stomach as you wonder if Lee Donghyuck is nearby.
“Wasn’t he with the Goguryeo army in Seorabeol?” Taeil asks as you slowly nod your head. “Then we can no longer escape… I need to take responsibility for the men I’ve lost. Will you go on without me?”
“What…?” You look at him puzzled, “I can’t do that!”
Dejun had remained silent for the short exchange, but now he speaks up, “Yes, I do work with their forces. But I have been given no orders regarding the Hwarang.” His eyes shift to you, “My only business here is with her.”
“Me?” Your brow furrows as he crosses his arms.
“Donghyuck is… vexed by you, and that commander of yours. He disregards the kingdom’s wishes and does as he pleases, not as he is ordered. Yeon Gaesomun is troubled, to say the least. And for now, we don’t wish to cut our ties with Goguryeo quite yet.” The light in his eyes promises violence, and his body tightens as his hand rests on the hilt of his sword, ready to make good on whatever promise he’d made. With a swift flourish, he relinquishes his blade from its sheath and narrows his eyes at you, “And for that, you must die here.”
With shaky hands, you reach for your blade, already knowing you’re no match for the Demon.
“He’s after me,” you look frantically to Taeil, “Only me. You need to escape!”
“But—!” Taeil says, panic riddling his expression.
“I’ll be fine,” you try to reassure him with a small smile. “The Hwarang need you now more than ever, you can’t abandon them.”
His mouth hangs slack for a moment, speechless. Then he shuts his jaw and draws his sword,“No matter the reason, an honorable warrior cannot run away and leave a woman to fight alone.” Despite your protest, he gets into a fighting stance, slowly closing the distance between Dejun and himself. His face calm and serene, you don’t see any hesitation in his eyes, “My recklessness has seen many of my men to their death, I don’t want it to lead another away.”
You’d seen this same expression on Jisung’s face just before he’d died on Donghyuck’s blade. Taeil’s mind has already been made.
“I am Moon Taeil, Chief of the Hwarang!” With his sword held high, he charges Dejun.
The intense force of their clash sends a shockwave rippling through the air. The clangor of metal rings out and the two part.
“You challenge me knowing that you cannot win, for the sake of someone who cannot defend themselves…” Dejun almost lets a smile creep onto the corner of his lips, “Your actions are worthy of respect.”
Taeil swings at his last word, Dejun sliding away as if he’s made of water. His hand outstretches and grabs the metal of Taeil’s blade, pushing the hilt of it into the Chief’s stomach.
As Taeil groans out, falling towards the ground, Dejun flips him around so that he slams directly onto his back.
“I’ve knocked most of the air out of him. He won’t be able to move for quite some time,” Dejun glances at Taeil writhing on the ground and then looks at you. “You’re next. Do not blame me for what I have to do.”
Raising his blade, he charges at you, kicking you in the stomach as you have no time to dodge his attack. Feeling like your whole body is about to shatter, you endure the pain just a bit more and struggle to your feet.
“You just saw the difference in our power… Are you sure you still want to put up a fight?” He asks, looking at the blade locked tightly in your grip. Noticing that you’re not budging, he nods, “Very well. I’ll humor you, then.”
Giving a huff, you readjust your grip on your sword and rush at Dejun. However, he evades your attack with no effort. You murmur to yourself how you need to change your movements, and begin to swing rapidly at him. Yet, once again, his elegant technique moves him out of the path of your blade. No matter how many times you charge and slash at him, there’s no way you’ll even scathe him. It’s not until his leg moves and kicks your arm with the force of a falling boulder that you move again.
The pain is so immediately overwhelming, you drop your blade to the forest floor, crying out in pain as you fall to the ground. Your knees skim across the dirt, digging into the earth and scraping your skin. Your brain screams at you to move, to fight, but the roar of your surely broken arm drowns it out almost entirely.
“This fight is done,” Dejun says quietly, “Don’t worry, I’ll make it quick.”
Your eyes close as you hear him approach, and a myriad of thoughts runs through you. An apology to Kun, first and foremost, he’d told you to survive and now you’re doing everything but. A tear carves its way down the side of your cheek as you wait for the blow to hit you.
“Giving up so soon?” A voice says calmly, “The Hwarang don’t stop fighting until they’re dead. The only thing on your mind right now should be how you’re going to out-think this idiot.”
That voice…
Your head raises and eyes shoot open just in time to see Kun leap through the air and land a strike with his sword on Dejun’s arm.
“You!” Dejun says as he recoils.
“I thought I’d only be fighting soldiers out here… Guess I’ll be taking care of a Demon, too,” Kun huffs, his white hair glimmering in the moonlight.
“Have you learned nothing since your fight with Donghyuck?” Dejun huffs, “A Fury is a mere echo of a true Demon. No matter how powerful you may think yourself, you cannot defeat us.”
Kun lets out a short laugh, “Never know until you try…”
“Only bloodshed will satisfy you… Very well.” Dejun raises his sword, “I’ll be your opponent.” Giving him a short nod, Dejun once again falls easily into a ready stance.
Kun’s blade flickers through the air, a little more than a glint of silver in the moonlight. Dejun blocks it with his own sword, dodging away from the attack. With his brow furrowed, Kun braces himself for the pushback that Dejun does, using the momentum against the commander to shove him back.
Kun’s face twists as his feet slide back into the dirt. Be it his Fury-born strength or his adrenaline- he surges forward after a split second, charging toward Dejun. His blade leaps forward, burying itself into the Demon’s chest. Blood flies from the gash, splashing across Kun’s face.
A startled noise falls from his mouth and he jerks back, pulling his sword from the wound. No sooner had it been out does the wound begin to close.
“Right…” Kun shakes his head, “You heal quickly, don’t you? It’s straight through the heart or not at all, huh?” His sword shines with the sheen of fresh blood, “I’ve got you figured out, though. I know how you move. You’re tough, but you’re not impossible.”
Drenched in blood, Kun looks more monster than human, his eyes wide and hungry. There’s something terrifying and inhuman about his expression as he whips his sword through the air.
Dejun leaps back, Kun’s sword almost catching his hand as he does so. Jabs and parries, feints and counter-feints… The battle flows between them like a living thing; it changes, moving too fast for any mortal eye to track. Neither of the two men show any sign of tiring as they dodge and attack in ways that would be unthinkable for any human.
Even in the maelstrom of death and violence, you can see Kun smiling.
The smell of blood hangs heavy in the air, and his grin speaks of a Fury’s lust for death.
“I never imagined a Fury could match me in battle…” Dejun murmurs as the two part, “You are unexpected. This power, though, what will you do with it?”
“What?” Kun says, confused. “Protect those I care for. What other reason could there be for wanting power?”
“Those you care for… Would you count Silla among that number?”
“No… This is bigger than the Kingdom. They can’t compare.”
Dejun closes his eyes and stays silent for  a moment. What’s gotten into him? Why had he stopped fighting?
This would be a perfect time to strike, right?
Just as you think to pick up your blade and move toward him, you feel a hand on your shoulder, “Stay back.” Yuta, who you hadn’t heard return, stops you despite your protest. “That Demon no longer thirsts for blood. This battle is over.”
“Demons are not meant to involve themselves in the world of humans,” Dejun states as he opens his eyes to stare at Kun, who’d lowered his sword. “Now that you’ve become a Fury, you belong in the shadows as well.”
“Yeah.” Kun says shortly, “I’m not interested in my name being written in the annals.”
“If you understand that, I shall leave the rest to you.” Dejun shakes his head, “Donghyuck is proud, even for a Demon. If you have indeed humiliated him, I doubt he will ever forgive you. It is unlikely that you will defeat him… However, if there is something you wish to protect, then please… use the powers you’ve been granted to do so.”
In his own stoic way, Kun looks as confused as you feel. Can Dejun be trusted?
“There is one more thing I must tell you…” Dejun warns, “The power of the Furies is not magic, or a gift from the gods. Great strength, lightning speed, and mortal wounds that close themselves… This power was already within you, but had you stayed human you would have spent it in decades, not minutes. You are only borrowing these things.”
Your fingernails dig into your palms at the realization. By ‘borrowing’, does he mean that when Kun taps into the speed and strength of a Fury, he’s picking away at his future—his life?
“So you’re saying that every time I use that stuff, my life gets a little shorter?” Kun asks and Dejun nods. The commander lets out a short laugh, “Makes sense. Seemed too good to be true. Guess it’s only natural that I’d have to trade something for this kind of power.”
“Then I will be on my way…”
“Hold on. I want to ask you something.” Kun stops him before he can run off, “You sure you want to let us get away? If you don’t kill me now, I’m pretty sure I’ll end up killing your friend.”
“If you defeat him, then that was all he amounted to.” Dejun states plainly, “We Demons are not sentimental.” Then, with a last polite nod, he disappears into the night,
With his enemy gone, Kun slumps and takes a long, deep breath.
“Are you alright?” Your voice comes out quietly as you look at him.
“Fine. Where’s Taeil?”
“Over there,” Yuta gestures as Kun runs off toward the Chief.
“Are you okay?” Kun asks as Taeil looks at him wide-eyed, “Are you hurt?”
“Kun… you…” With Kun standing before him, his white hair and red eyes bright in the moonlight, he looks as if he’s seen a ghost. A Fury.
“Oh…” Kun begins but looks away, almost guiltily.
Staring at him a moment before speaking again, Taeil notes in a soft, stunned voice, “Are you… a Fury?”
“Uh, yeah.” Kun admits, “I didn’t have a choice, alright? It was for the Hwarang,”
For a moment, he sounds composed, but as you look closer you can see that he’s desperately avoiding Taeil’s gaze. Not being able to bear looking him in the eye.
Everyone is silent for a moment before the first raindrop hits you, taking you by surprise.
“…It’s starting to rain…” Kun sighs, “We need to get back to Ungjin and reorganize. We need to discuss our next move.”
“Right,” you nod, reaching out to tug at Taeil’s sleeve, “Come on, we need to hurry.” Taeil simply stands there, almost as if he’s forgotten how to walk. “Is something wrong?” It begins to rain harder yet he doesn’t budge.
Rain runs down his cheeks to his chin, or are they tears?
“What…” He murmurs, “What have I been doing…? Today I sent men—men who trusted me—into battle. They died. And I’ve made you,” his gaze flickers to Kun, “a man I’ve known for years, into a Fury. A monster…”
“Taeil…” Kun’s brow furrows at him, “What is this? No one blames you. We were able to take the city because Wen Junhui’s forces showed up— No matter how good of a tactician you are, we couldn’t have taken Hanseong alone.” He shakes his head, “I made bad calls too, and it got Jisung and Minhyung killed. We cannot change the past. What we can do is turn this around and keep fighting with our all. Besides, I don’t regret becoming a Fury.”
He laughs shortly, “Hell, I’m stronger and faster than I ever was, and I can use that to help you out. Nothing could make me happier.”
Rain pours onto their faces. Surely it’s in your imagination, but for a moment, it almost looks as if Kun is crying. Taeil stares at him for a long moment, then finally draws himself together.
“I’m sorry,” Taeil shakes his head with a small smile, “I was being foolish. Forget what I said.” Something in his voice tells you that even he doesn’t quite believe that.
 December 2nd, 665 – Ungjin, Kingdom of Silla The Hwarang had returned to Ungjin. Rejoining with your friends and the rest of the men who had stayed behind feels bittersweet. Your mind often turns to Taeil, who expectedly remains disconsolate after his first defeat on the battlefield. 
Even after the attempts to rouse him, he spends most of his time in his quarters, moping. The man who had come in only hours after the Hwarang had given up their position in Hanseong, Wen Junhui, would be arriving in Ungjin any day now. His victory over the Goguryeo forces had been a swift undertaking, something of a thorn in the Chief’s side. 
You think of this future meeting as someone brushes past you just as you’re about to begin lighting the lanterns outside of the headquarters. 
“Oh– Yuta? Are you off to work?”
The man gives you a curt nod, “When you have a moment, could you make some tea and bring it to Kun?” Without waiting for a response, he gives you a small smile and scurries off. 
Yuta had never been a talkative man in your presence, or anyone’s, really. Yet he’d lately taken on a taciturn demeanor. Is he still upset by the events from Hanseong…? Or maybe… 
The day after the large posse had returned to Ungjin, you awoke the next morning to Yukhei and JAehyun loitering around the main hall, their gear and belongings tucked away into haphazardly made bags. 
‘We’ve made up our minds’ you recall Yukhei saying, a dimness in his voice that you would have never attributed to him prior to that meeting. ‘Our path isn’t Taeil’s. I don’t think we can follow him anymore.’ 
It was a blurry goodbye after that, and you suspect that you’re not fully over their departure, either. Of course, you’ve only known them for a few years, not the lifetime it seems that they’ve had with the other men. 
Along with their departure, Yongqin had been moved to Sabi, a southern town known for its medicinal practices. Finding his room empty left you feeling bereft as well. 
One by one, the group that you’d come to find as a second family is slowly falling apart. 
As you light the last lantern you sigh to yourself and decide to go make tea, as requested by Yuta. 
The tray remains sturdy in your grasp, even if you can hear the ceramic clinking against itself as you approach the Commander’s door, “Good evening, I’ve brought you tea…” As you speak, you open the door, stopping almost immediately as the gazes of Kun, Jaemin and Taeyong fall onto you. 
Their conversation must’ve been important judging by the hardset lines carved into their expressions. 
“I’m sorry!” You say quickly, “I hadn’t realized that you were in the middle of a meeting.” Feet trailing backwards, you’re almost out of the room when Kun speaks up.
“You can stay.” 
His words halt your movement and Taeyong piques your interest as he looks back to Kun, glaring, “You cannot possibly be serious about this! Why would you halt the augmentation of the Fury Corps?!” 
“I am serious,” Kun’s attention turns from you and once back to his comrade. “I will not have any more men being turned into Furies. Make do with what you have.” 
“I apologize but I cannot support your decision. The Hwarang’s power is at an all time low, even if Silla is standing against Goguryeo and winning– I think that expanding the Fury Corps to keep this fight pushing forward is our only option.” Taeyong’s voice is a strained composure as he grits his teeth and continues, “Jaemin told me that Yukhei and Jaehyun have left. That is a serious blow to us, Kun.”
“You saw what happened in Hanseong– Even if we recruit more, they’ll run off on us. Wasting our effort on pitiful men like that is foolish. Would it not be better to focus on those who have abided by our code? Who understands what it means to be a Hwarang?” 
Jaemin looks to the floor, his shoe gently tapping the boards underneath. He’s been silent since you arrived, but you can clearly see that he isn’t agreeing with Taeyong fully. 
“You make several good points, Taeyong.” Kun frowns, his arms crossing, “If we want increased strength, the best way to attain that is through the Fury Corps.”
“Then why–!” Taeyong begins.
“There’s a problem with the Furies. A big one. We only just found out about it and our source is,” Kun glances at you briefly, “reliable.” With your eyes widening at what’s to come, you can only look at Jaemin's and Taeyong’s faces as he divulges what Dejun had told you. 
“The power of a Fury comes from your… potential. The more you use it, the shorter your life becomes.”
Taeyong’s gaze, usually cool and calculating, goes awry as he processes. From his standing position he falls to his knees, hitting the wood with a thud. A surge of realization of his powerlessness registers within him. 
“Yeah,” Kun’s voice falls into a somber lull, “We shouldn’t be using the Furies unless we really have to.”
After several long moments of silence, Taeyong raises his head to speak, “Then that is yet another reason why the research must continue.” He pushes himself from the floor, brushing off his knees and looking at Kun, “It is a flaw, yes, and a serious one. But with more research… We may find a way to circumvent, or even counteract, it entirely. As a Fury, you should understand.”
“This is not a request, Taeyong. This is an order.” Kun’s arms uncross and seems ready to impose his status over the other, “As your Commander, I am telling you that research on Furies will stop. There will be no more.”
Taeyong says nothing, he just glares at Kun until seconds once again turn into minutes. 
“Let’s go, Taeyong…” Jaemin tries to urge him. When Taeyong turns to him, you can see lines in his face, perhaps proof that his life is already steadily leaving him. 
You step aside to let them leave, and as they open the door, the figure of Taeil is seen passing by in the hall. 
“Oh, Chief,” Jaemin stops, “Were you coming in?”
“No…Uh… No, I’m just out for a walk,” Taeil chuckles, “Just passing by. Don’t mind me.” A few more pleasantries were exchanged and then the sound of three sets of footsteps trail away down the hall. 
You’re reminded of Kun’s presence when he sighs behind you, you spin on your heels and note that he’s looking forlornly out of the small window in his room. 
“I’m sure the tea’s cold by now,” you look at the tray in your hands, “Let me get you a fresh pot.”
“No,” he stops you, gaze broken from the window and now linked to you, “I’m thirsty, cold tea’s perfect.” His hand gingerly reaches out to the tray as you approach and swiftly grabs one of the cups atop it. Kun brings his lips to the porcelain and he sighs, a distant look twinkles in his eyes.  
“He’s right, you know.” Kun says as he sets his empty cup down. “Taeyong’s right. Jaehyun and Yukhei leaving…  It hurt us bad.” His voice shakes almost imperceptibly, his lips curling into a bitter smile, “I had a feeling this might happen someday. It’s our fault for falling short of what they wanted. But damn, we sure have lost a lot of people. Things are undeniably different now.”
You can’t even begin to imagine what’s going through his head. He’s been working from dusk to dawn, has he even had time to grieve anyone properly? Even with the strength that his newfound Fury powers had given him, you can see the horrible toll it’s taken on his body. 
“Kun…” you say softly, “you have to stop.”
“What?” His voice is much rougher than you though, giving you momentary pause.
“I’m only telling you to do what you told Taeyong to do a few moments ago. Don’t use your Fury abilities unless it’s an emergency.” 
“Why should I listen to you?” His expression questioning. 
“Well… You turned into a Fury to save me from Donghyuck, you wouldn’t have had to unl–” 
“This again?” He sighs, “Look, I said I chose to do it. I wasn’t forced.”
A pang reverberates around your ribcage, “When you say things like that, it only makes it worse. If you’re in pain, just say so. Don’t you wish you’d never become a Fury?”  
For a moment, the room is quiet, and then Kun begins to laugh. “I just can’t win with you, can I? You really are from the countryside.” Another chortle before he continues, “I can’t remember if I’ve told you this before– Anyway, I am the adopted son of a sixth rank noble, I hardly knew my birth parents. I was raised with the noble’s son and daughter, Hoseok and Joohyun. You kind of sound like Joohyun. Yongqin’s sister Cheng sounds the same way too. When you go off, it’s like I’m being scolded by my family. Makes me feel like I have to listen to you.”
You’d never heard him speak of his childhood like this before. It’s surreal in a way. 
“If what Dejun told us is true, then as long as I don’t use my Fury powers, I’ll be alright, right?” His lightheartedness flees slightly as he huffs out a puff of air, “If it gets bad I’ll let you know. Stop worrying about me.” 
He’ll likely keep most of his pain to himself– that’s just who he is, but if he really means what he’d said…
“I understand,” you say with a nod, another thought beginning to bubble to the surface. “So… What will happen to the Hwarang now?”  
“Well, we need to get Taeil to snap out of it, but after that, we’re heading north.”
“North? You mean back to…” 
“Yeah, back to Hanseong.” Kun cedes with a sigh, “The Tang forces may have saved our asses up there but it doesn’t mean that they don’t want every man they can take fighting alongside them. Some of Namekawa’s men are stationed there too, hoping to round up some men and head to Bakjak. We’ll try to pincer Pyongyang and take those–” Suddenly, Kun’s body contorts and hunches, his hand grasping at his now heaving chest. His eyes wide in pain, sweat begins to pour from his head and he mutters out through clenched teeth, “Fuck, fuck–!” 
“Kun?” Your mouth lays agape as the hair on his head turns an alabaster white. It’s bloodlust, you’re sure of it. “You need blood…” The sentence isn’t a question, and you react almost instinctively, recalling what you’d done for him before. 
With unsteady hands you reach for the blade at your hip, laying its cool edge on the palm of your hand before his hand grasps around your wrist. Trying to pull away, you're met with a fervent shaking of his head. 
“I’ll do it,” he murmurs, straightening himself to the best of his ability. Kun moves around you, standing behind you as he loosens your collar as the night air hits your neck followed by his fingertips. Seconds later you feel the kiss of a cold blade against your neck before feeling it slide against your skin. You try your best not to wince but the air makes the cut sting. 
The cold is eventually replaced by the warmth of his face as his lips fall onto the cut. Heat raids your body, never before had you been this close to a man before. Nerves make your body twist to try and look at him until Kun’s hands grab your shoulders.
“Don’t look,” his voice low, husky. And you nod, not particularly sure that you want to see him in his Fury state. Those few words– a last, strained defense of his wounded pride– tear at your heart, and a knot gets stuck in your throat. For his sake you try and calm your nerves, although you can still feel your heart racing.
“I’m sorry… I can’t afford to lose it right now.” You’re unsure if he’s saying that to calm himself or calm you. 
“Of course…” Your voice leaves you quietly, “You don’t need to hold back, I want to help in whatever way I can.” 
In the days you watched both Minhyung and Jisung die, you’d find yourself inundated with near tortuous regret. There had been nothing in your power you could do for them. Ever since those fateful days it has been your resolve to help the Hwarang after they’d aided and sheltered you for so long. 
Kun’s grip tightens on your shoulder, and a wave of emotions washes over you– guilt, disappointment, anger, regret– and you soon realize that they are not your own. They’re his. 
Eventually he lets go and steps away from you.
“I’m sorry for doing that…” His hair back to its darkened state, he can’t seem to meet your gaze. 
“It’s nothing,” you insist, adjusting the collar of your outfit that he’d shifted aside, “See? The cut’s already closed up.” Seeing his still-stolid demeanor, you continue, “I’ll be staying here for a while longer so please, if you need anything, just let me know.” 
“So I can just drink your blood whenever?” 
You nod, “You can.”
Kun cracks an eye open and gives you a small chuckle as he shakes his head, “Shouldn’t say things like that. Someone’s gonna use you up and throw you away.” 
You know he’s joking, but there’s a part of you that feels if it were he that used you up then it wouldn’t be that bad. 
April 7th, 666 - Hanseong, Kingdom of Silla Sometime after the incident between Kun and you, you begin to move northward, back to Hanseong. Nearly a month after its liberation from the Goguryeo forces, the Hwarang settled on a private estate just outside of the city’s walls. Taeil had been reluctant to return to the battlefields, but after several conversations with Kun, he’d become convinced otherwise. 
Until the preparations to siege Pyongyang were in place, you would be set up in Hanseong to train. Yuta had gone to a town some ways south to train in Tang weaponry with one of Wen Junhui’s assistants, Hao Chujun. Taeyong and Jaemin had left with the Fury Corps along the naval route to Bakjak as they were not permitted to travel to Hanseong. 
“Do you know where the Chief is?” A voice calls out to you, and you turn to see Jeong Sungchan standing there, his eyes wide. 
“I think he’s reading in his room,” you have to think of when you last saw him. Weight shifting from foot to foot you try not to look concerned, “Is something the matter?” 
“It’s nothing in particular, but…” There’s a peculiar expression on his face you can’t quite grasp. “I can’t shake this worrying feeling like he’s lost the will for us to fight again since the last time we were here…” 
“Hmm…” You purse your lips, “I don’t think that’s the case. I can’t say that he’s completely lost his will to fight.”
Sungchan is hesitant to respond as he stays quiet, eventually speaking again, “You’re probably right, huh? I mean, Commander Qian is still giving his all for him. I’m sure he’ll return to his old self soon enough.” With that, Sungchan quickly scurries off, racing back into the depths of the manor. 
As you watch him, you can’t help but let his words sting you a little. Taeil certainly had lost some of that ambitious fire he’d always had in his eyes as of late. If he wasn’t holed up reading in his room, he’d spend time in solitude out in the garden. Yet, you hold on hope that his confidence had deflated only a little after the battle in Hanseong. 
Prompted by the meeting with Sungchan, you decide to pay the Chief a visit a few hours later. 
“I’ve brought you some tea,” You say quietly as you slide open the door. Taeil sits behind his desk, nose buried in a bound novel, and he greets you with a smile. “What are you reading?” 
“Oh, this is Jemangmaega,” he lowers the book, closing it but saving his place with a scrap piece of parchment. A collection of poems but more critical than that if one reads further into the text. I practically know them by heart now, but with each time I reread them I find I learn something new.”
“When I was younger I wanted to be just like Kim Yushin– he fought for others, more so than just himself,” his grin lasts for a moment before fading, “But I suppose dreaming about being a great commander doesn’t just make you one… I wish I realized that a bit sooner.”
“What are you talking about?” You tilt your head, “You’ve only just begun.” 
“... How’s Kun?” He asks, not seeming to have heard your prior statement. 
“I think he’s in his room writing something.” You state, “Probably writing orders for Yuta, he’s off with Hao Chujun in Kyeju, you know.” 
“Ah…” Taeil sighs, “I keep giving Kun so much to do.”
“I don’t think he’s pushing himself too hard,” you say quickly, “And nothing makes him happier than being able to help you. That’s just the kind of guy he is.” 
Taeil chuckles at that, “You’ve turned out to be quite a page to him, haven’t you? I think you know him quite well by now.” 
“You think so?” You feel your cheeks warm at his certainty. “That’s right… I was supposed to be his page, wasn’t I?”
“To be truthful, I never thought that you’d be with us for this long…” Before you knew it, the two of you had begun to reminisce about your time in Seorabeol. Back then, you never could have guessed where fate would take you. There have been constant challenges, but you thought that’d you’d eventually return to your lives in the capital. 
“I know things will work out. The Commander will get us through this.” 
Taeil responds with a melancholy laugh, “Don’t you think you’re asking quite a bit of him?”
“... What do you mean?”
Before Taeil has any time to answer, the door opens with a snap, Shotaro and Kun briskly walking inside, their faces tense and drawn. 
“We have to go. Now.” Kun says sharply, “The place’s surrounded.” 
“There’s two, maybe three hundred of them out there. We came in through the back so they wouldn’t see us,” Shotaro says solemnly.
“If it were only twenty or thirty then we could take them… But we don’t have time to call Yuta and his men. Guess we’ll have to come up with something here. You two take Taeil and go on ahead,” Kun says quickly. 
“What?!” You speak up, “Not even you can take on that many people. And it’s still daytime…” 
“A majority of the soldiers out there are archers,” Shotaro says as both you and he move toward the door in an effort to block it should Kun try and get out. 
Taeil, having been in quiet contemplation since their arrival, speaks out, “You needn't do that, Kun. I’ll go and have them take me to their headquarters.” 
“What the hell?!” Kun shouts out incredulously, “You might as well just paint a target on your chest!” 
“I won’t introduce myself as Moon Taeil of the Hwarang, of course,” Taeil sighs as he rises to his feet, “I’ll tell them that we’re soldiers here to just secure the location. At any rate, it should buy you enough time to get away.” 
While you and Shotaro lay shocked into silence, Kun doesn’t relent, “Listen to yourself! You really think they’ll let you waltz in and fuck with them like that?! You know how they work! There’s no way in hell that those bastards don’t hate our guts! They won’t believe that shit about us being soldiers for a second!”
“Well, even if I do get captured, I have the status of a Lord. They can’t just kill me.” 
“You have got to be kidding me.” Kun’s face is a near vibrant red at the moment, “You think they’ll give a shit about a title you have from the Kingdom they’re against?! You go out there, you’re signing your death warrant. You really think I’ll just let you do that?!” 
No matter what the Commander yells at him, Taeil’s expression doesn’t change. 
“I’ve made my decision. Nothing you say can convince me otherwise.” 
Kuns fists begin to shake by his sides. In all your time with the Hwarang, you’ve never seen either of them act like this before. 
“No! No! What the hell are the Hwarang going to do without their Chief?!” Kun shouts, “You’re coming with me even if I have to knock you out and drag you along! You have a responsibility to the Hwarang! You don’t get to die and run away from that!” He’s screaming at Taeil, his white knuckled fists now gripping the front of the other man’s robes and his eyes red with held-back tears.
Yet his fury and pleas break across Taeil’s impassable calm like wind against a mountain. 
“This is a direct order!” Taeil says sternly as Kun’s hands drop from his robes, “You will go to Kyeju to meet with the rest of our men. The two of you will accompany him as well.” Kun stumbles back a step or two at the force of Taeil’s voice. 
“You’re going to tell me what to do…? What the hell is this?!” Kun asks near incredulously. 
“Aren’t your Chief’s orders absolute?” Taeil asks with a tilt of his head, “You’ve ordered men to kill themselves, or to become Furies from disobeying that rule. Are you somehow an exception? Is that the sort of warrior you want to be?” 
Kun says nothing. 
As long as he’d been commander, Kun strove to lead by example. He lived by the O Gye and demanded that others do likewise to groom the Hwarang into true warriors. There’s no doubt Taeil had counted on that fact. He meant to do it to keep Kun alive.
Taeil looks to you and Shotaro, stepping a few paces in your direction, “I want you to leave with Kun. If you take too long, they’ll attack and my surrender will mean nothing.” He gives you two a small shove to get you moving, Shotaro turns to look at Kun.
“Commander… Let’s go.” 
He only stands, chewing his lip, until Taeil lays his hands on his friend’s shoulders, giving him a warm smile. 
“Hey, Kun… Let it go. Let me go.” Taeil says softly, “You’ve run yourself ragged trying to earn me the status and fame that I wanted. You even turned yourself into a Fury… It kills me to see you do all of these things for me… I’m not worth it.”
Kun doesn’t meet his friend’s gaze, he instead blinks rapidly, trying to hold back tears, and stares desperately at the floor. Then he swallows the lump in his throat, his voice tight and strained when he speaks, “I– If I do this, then what have I been fighting for all these years? I became a warrior, served our Kingdom… I won numerous battles and killed men… All because I thought you’d be there at the end with all of us…” 
“I’m sorry,” Taeil’s voice reflects the softness of the other’s, “I brought you here, I did this to you. Thinking back on it, it was all sort of a dream. We weren’t real warriors yet but we strapped on our swords and went to work.” His voice is warm, but that seems to make it even more difficult for Kun to let go.
The room is still before the commander speaks, “Osaki… Send a message to our remaining men. We need to secure an escape route.” His gaze then falls to you, “Stay here. Once we’re ready, I’ll come get you.” 
“Okay,” you nod quickly. And with that, Shotaro and Kun leave, and Taeil and you are alone once more. 
“Take this with you,” Taeil says as he begins to reach for something in his robes. After a moment, he hands you a small cloth bag, it clinks as it rests in your palm. 
“What is it?”
“Money. To help you escape. I wasn’t able to do anything for you. This is a token of my appreciation, for all you’ve done for us. Please, take it.” His warmth still lingers on the fabric of the bag, you feel a lump rise in your throat. “You still have time. I’ll tell Kun. Once you get away, go somewhere safe and look for Doctor Namekawa… Just forget you had anything to do with us. Marry someone you love and live a peaceful life. Find happiness.” 
While you appreciate his kind gestures you cannot find it within yourself to follow his guidance, “No, I won’t run. I want to go with Kun. I’m… I’m his page…” Your teeth catch your lip, afraid that if you say any more you may cry. Instead, you look up to Taeil and do your best to smile. 
His eyes are warm as he looks to you, “Our Commander’s been blessed with some great friends. I’ll be counting on you, then. Take care of him for me.” 
Eventually, Kun and Shotaro return. They gather you and the rest of the men in an outer courtyard on the premises, including Jeno and Sungchan. 
“What?!” Jeno shouts, “We’re going to leave Chief behind? Is that true Commander?!” 
“Chief’s orders,” Kun says sternly, “You’re all going to escape this place and I’ll be right behind you.” 
“If he just surrenders, then his cover will be blown immediately!” Jeno insists, “At least here, I could remain by his si–” 
“I said, ‘Chief’s orders’! Or do you have shit in your ears?!” Kun snaps, “Don’t you dare put Taeil’s efforts in vain with your stupid suggestions!”
Jeno looks as if he wants to respond, but instead he looks down as he tightens his fists and shakes. 
Just then, Sungchan says, “I’m going to stay. I understand they’re the Chief’s orders. However, as a warrior of the Hwarang, I cannot abandon the Chief.” 
“Jeong Sungchan!” Shotaro raises his voice, only to be interjected. 
 “Sungchan you bastard…” Kun frowns, “You really want this steel in your gut right now?”
“No! It’s not like that,” Sungchan’s eyes burn with intense vigor as he glares back at Kun. “I understand you, more than anyone else, want to remain here. But the Chief entrusted the Hwarang to you, which is why you can’t… So that’s why I want to protect him in your stead, Commander!” 
Kun curls his lip, staring at him for a long moment before unsheathing his blade at his hip. 
“Commander!” As the exclamation leaves Shotaro’s mouth, Kun points the tip of the sword toward Sungchan’s throat.
“You said you’ll protect the Chief, right?”
Sweat trickles down Sungchan’s reddened cheeks, “...Yes, I will.” 
“Then you’d better keep your goddamn word. No matter what, your eyes don’t leave Moon, got it?” 
Sungchan’s eyes grow wide, trembling for a moment but soon after brim with a fiery determination, “Yes, sir! I, Jeong Sungchan, promise to protect the Chief's life, no matter the cost!” 
It seems as if he’s convinced Kun, as the latter returns his blade to its sheath. “Let’s go.” His words are curt as he nods quikly before leaving the residence behind. 
In a short while, Taeil and Sungchan will hand their terms of surrender to the Goguryeo army. You find yourself looking back over your shoulder many times as you run. Soon, Taeil will surrender to his enemies. Perhaps, you think time and time again, if you turn around now, you can rescue him, 
Shotaro seems to feel the same way, but Kun never once turns back. 
April 7th, 666 – The Road South, Kingdom of Silla You run and run through the forest to Kyeju. It doesn’t matter how quickly you get there– it’s not soon enough to bring back an army to save Taeil. 
“Are you alright?” Shotaro asks as he falls in step by your side, “We can rest if you’re tired.” 
“I’m alright,” you shake your head, “I can keep going.” 
Kun, with his back to you, says nothing, but you can feel each pained step he takes away from his friend. 
The sun begins to dip towards the western horizon and night starts to fall when your party is stopped by a group of Goguryeo soldiers. 
“You there! Stop!” One of them commands, his hand already hovering over the hilt of his sword, “Where are you headed?” 
Kun only frowns and makes his way to walk past the soldier. 
“He said to stop!” Another soldier yells out, “Goddamn it, are you more of those Silla guys?”
“Hold,” the first man pauses, “I’ve seen him before. You’re that bastard from the Hwarang, aren’t you?”
“You mean those guys that offed Suh?” The soldiers around them begin to scramble for their weapons.
Unfortunately, they aren’t fast enough for Kun. His hair snaps white and he shoots forward, toward the soldiers, sword in hand. His strikes are so fast and elegant that the eye barely even has time to perceive what happened before the two men fall dead. 
“Wrong day to fuck with me, boys.” 
A volley of soldiers rush forward, as well as a few arrows loosened in his direction. One of the arrows pierces his shoulder and Kun cries out, swiftly pulling it from the wound. It immediately begins to close as he smirks at them, “That’s how it feels getting shot, huh? Not as bad as I thought.” His gaze sharpens on those left before him, “This is nothing! This doesn’t even come close to what Taeil’s going through!” 
Kun launches himself at the nearest of the soldiers, his sword already in motion and his face twisted by grief and anger. Even without Fury powers, Kun and Shotaro could have made easy work of this small troop of men… But rage and frustration boiling over since you’d left Taeil had erupted in a torrent of violence. 
“You can’t use your powers–!” You call out to Kun, trying to stop his relentless assault. 
“Shut up!” He snarls at you, “Stay out of this!” 
He knows what he’s doing, but he’s far past caring. Kun leaps from tree to tree, his sword flashing like lightning. Every time it moves, a life ends. Rage, anguish and an unrestrained thirst for blood radiates from him like heat from a blaze from a fire. Blood soaks his face and hands. Still, he cuts and cuts, never satisfied. 
You see Shotaro and Jeno sweating as they stand silently, watching Kun fight as a Fury. They’re mesmerized and you can hardly blame them. Every swing of his sword spills a man to the dirt. He looks like a monster. At last, the only man left alive is Kun himself. 
Silence falls over the forest once more, save for the birds that have restarted their chatter, 
“Shotaro… Jeno… Go see if there’s any more of them.” Desperate to distance themselves from the bloodshed, the two depart quickly after Kun’s orders. “You. Go with them.” 
Normally you would do as he’d asked and followed after them but now… 
“What?” Kun turns to you, noticing your hesitation, “I gave you an order.” His words cut like a knife but you don’t move. 
“I’m sorry, but I can’t do that.”
“I am your commanding officer. I am giving you an order.” He sounds angry, as he oft does, but just behind that there's a deep, miserable sadness. If he doesn’t stay angry, you feel, he’d probably be crying.
“I promise I won’t get in your way, but please, just let me stay here with you.” There’s nothing you can do for him, but you cannot bear to leave him alone. 
He turns his back to you– to everything, his face hidden. You have no idea what expression he’s wearing.
You search yourself for something to say, something to ease him, but you find nothing within yourself to better him. And, after a few moments, he speaks.
“What the hell did I do… all of this for?” 
How can this be the fate dealt by the god for two men so honest and determined? It just doesn’t seem fair…
“Was it just so I could give Taeil to those bastards? I busted my ass to give my friend to the enemy?” His voice trembles with every word, the weight of it all still resting heavily on him, “I was going to make him important. Help him carry himself to his family’s standards. I wanted to see him fight in the kind of battles they wrote about. Like a true warrior… I wanted to see just how far the owner of a school in the sticks could go.” 
You’re not even sure if he knows that you’re still here. If he does, it seems as if he no longer cares.  
“I thought we were shooting for the same dream. Long as it was for him, I felt like I could do anything. So what the hell am I doing here, alive, while he’s… he’s god knows where?! After all that self-righteous preaching, what did I do?! I turned around and left him to the wolves! He… I’m just like the king. Soon as things get dangerous, I turn tail and leave better men to deal with the mess! God damn it! Why am I alive?!”
It tears you apart to hear him lament his inner machinations aloud. You find yourself stepping forward, wrapping your arms around him, pressing your face against his uniform. 
“Taeil said… I mean, after you’d left, I told him that you’d figure it out,” you say softly,  “and he said that I was asking too much of you.” Tears run hot down your cheeks, “It’s not your fault, you can’t blame yourself… He didn’t want you to die. That’s why you’re still alive. Just… Please don’t blame yourself.”
 Kun listens, saying nothing. Or perhaps he didn’t even hear you. Why do words feel so powerless when you need them the most? What good are they if you cannot comfort someone at their lowest? 
“He did this to save me… but what the hell am I supposed to do without Moon Taeil of the Hwarang? The dream of helping him is what brought me here in the first place.” Kun’s shoulders shake, “Now that dream has left me… I don’t have anything left. I’m nothing.” He gives a short bark of humorless laughter, “Seriously Moon… Stop giving me all the shitty jobs.”  His voice chokes on a sob and falls silent. 
April 10, 666 – Ungjin, Kingdom of Silla The days that followed were somber, and eventually your group returned to Ungjin before regrouping with Yuta in Kyeju. When you arrived in the city, Jeno mentioned he was going to visit a friend of his, and left. However, you think Jeno’s just trying to be considerate and give Kun some space.
Arriving back at the compound, you’re shocked to see none other than Li Yongqin waiting for you.
“Evening,” he says as you walk inside, “Who would’ve thought you guys would ever come to visit me?”
“Nevermind that you should be in Sabi– why are you up this late? Just look at you,” Kun frowns, crossing his arms.
“I’m a bit tired of sleeping alone, you know?” Yongqin muses, “At this rate, I’ll never get a chance to shine again… Seems to me it’s time to join you guys.” 
“The hell you won’t! What makes you think you can hold a sword with that body?” Kuns words cut through the air.
“Come on, cut me some slack.” Yongqin snorts, “I’ve been feeling great lately. So…” As he begins his next statement, he turns to cough into his fist. The fit doesn’t relent until he crouches on the floor, coughing painfully with strained breaths. 
“Are you alright, Yongqin?” You ask, rubbing his back as he tries to catch his breath. Under your palm, you can feel the bones of his back. At first glance, he may look to be improving but he’s lost a lot of weight and it’s almost painful to look at. 
“See?” Kun turns to look down at him, “What’d I tell you? Why don’t you admit you’re sick for once, and take it easy?”
Yongqin bites his lips out of frustration, grimacing at the thought of admitting his weakness, he sighs deeply and rises to his feet, “So, how’s Moon doing? Too busy to visit me again?” 
You flinch at the mention of Taeil, which causes your body to jolt unexpectedly. Kun, however, is unfazed by the question. 
“He’s a little preoccupied at the moment.” 
“How’s his shoulder doing? Isn’t it tough for him to be up and about?”
“That was a while ago. He’s fine.” Kun says, “He may not be able to wield his sword but, well, with his promotion, it’s not like he’s charging from the front lines anyway.” 
“Spare me,” Yongqin waves his hand, “You’re bragging about his promotion like it’s you out there and not him. But… that’s good to hear. Taeil’s okay then.” The Hwarang seems to have eased down. It looks as if Taeil’s well-being is the only thing keeping Yongqin invested in his own health. 
“Look,” Kun states, “I promise I’ll bring him next time. Just sit tight, okay?”
“Sure, I’ll wait. But I’m not holding my breath. You’ve always been a bad liar, Kun.”
“Who the hell are you calling a liar? I’ve never lied to you about Taeil.” The tone of their conversation sounds like their usual banter, but you can understand why Jeno may have been inclined to step out. You begin to gather that there’s much for them to reminisce on, so you take the chance to sneak outside. 
Cool nighttime air whispers against your cheeks as you gaze to the stars hanging above. It seems like tonight would be the final farewell between Kun and Yongqin, you need to let them have this moment to themselves. Being an outside observer to the intimacy of their conversation tells you this, at least. 
In the midst of your contemplation, you think you see Jeno speaking to someone in the distance. You know he said he’d been planning to meet a friend in Ungjin but you don’t recognize the figure. 
“Are you sure about that? You’re the Commander’s acquaintance, aren’t you?” You hear Jeno speak to him as you slowly approach. “You’re already here so why don’t you stop by?” 
“I think I’ll pass on that.” The person says coolly.
“Why?” Jeno questions further, “This may be the last time we step foot in Ungjin.”
“Wasn’t Taeil just arrested by Goguryeo soldiers in Hanseong?” The person murmurs, “I don’t know what I’d say to Kun in a time like this, knowing what everyone’s been through and all.”
Jeno’s head suddenly hangs, as the words from the conversation penetrate and resound around his head, “You don’t need to mince words. Just, you know, tell them how you feel… talk about what you’ve been up to, or what you’ve seen. Isn’t that good enough?” 
“Jeno…”  For a brief moment, the stranger looks unsettled by the suggestion. However, he takes a deep breath and continues, “But I was never one of the Hwarang. I just happened to be around when the newer group was established.”
“Then why did you paint them as Furies?” Jeno frowns, “If they didn’t matter to you anymore, then you wouldn’t go through the trouble of drawing that? It’s not like it’d make you any money.”
“Well…” The other stops.
“So, are you absolutely sure there’s nothing you’d want to say to the Commander, Colonel or Jaemin? You’re positive?” Jeno lists off the names of the Hwarang, only making you question the stranger yourself. Is he a friend of theirs? Perhaps Jeno had met with him to bring him to your side?
Whatever the case, the stranger’s countenance gives the impression that he’s reluctant to be involved at all. 
As you’re thinking of this person, a voice speaks up behind you, “You should go and talk to Yongqin while you can.” 
Kun. You hadn’t heard the door open, much less his footsteps approach.
“S- Sure,” you say quickly, spinning on your heels and walking into the house from the darkness. 
After making smalltalk for a while, Kun rejoins you and begins to say his farewell to him, “We’ll see you later, Li. Don’t trouble Namekawa too much.”
“I never do,” Yongqin shakes his head, “The man just worries too much.”
“Forever the smartass,” Kun rolls his eyes jokingly, “Whatever the case, we’ll be on our way soon.”
“Leaving already?” Yongqin asks, eyebrows raised. 
“Goodnight, Yongqin. Please take care of yourself.” You say with a small smile and begin to turn to leave.
“Hey,” Yongqin calls out to you, “Can I have a word?” He beckons you over with a gentle gesture so you walk to him. 
“Is something the matter?” 
“I know he won’t admit it, but Kun looks like shit. Are things at the front going bad?” 
If you speak too carelessly you can give away information– information that can easily hurt Yongqin, so you fall silent. 
“Here’s the thing: I don’t like that man at all, and quite frankly, I can’t give a rat’s ass what happens to him. But… I want you to be by his side. If he goes down, then the Hwarang go down with him.”
“I understand…” you murmur out before Kun butts in.
“Are we done here? Time to get going.” 
He doesn’t ask a thing about your conversation as he begins walking briskly ahead of you on the darkened streets. Watching him make that promise of bringing Taeil the next time he’d see Yongqin… it seems as though that burden of promise, and the potential of it being left unfulfilled, weighs heavily on him.
Suddenly, he stops in his tracks.
“You should go on ahead and go home.”
“Huh?” You pause yourself, “What do you mean? What do you plan on doing?”
“I’m going to speak to the Goguryeo forces in Hanseong,” he turns to face you, “And I’m going to personally ask them to release Taeil.”
“You’re going now?!” You sputter, “I thought you said they can’t be reasoned with?”
“If we can’t get results, then I can’t say we’ve done everything we could.”
“It’s not safe for you to go there! They could capture you at any moment!” Frantic energy runs in your voice, “If they take you like they did Taeil…” 
Yesterday this idea would have been preposterous to Kun, what happened to mak him change his mind?
“So you’re telling me to my face that this decision is a mistake?” 
“No… No I’m not saying that.”
“Then what is it?” He snaps, “If you have something to say, just say it.” 
“Stay strong.” You raise your voice, nearly shocking yourself,  “You of all people know what needs to be done.”
“I decide on what I do. It’s not your place to say.” 
“I understand, but what will you do if you’re arrested by the Goguryeo army?”
“So what if I am?” He frowns, crossing his arms, “Sitting here and talking about ‘what-ifs’ isn’t any better than taking action.  
“So you’re going to let Minhyung and Jisung’s sacrifices go in vain?!”
“What do you know?!” He explodes, and you have to stop yourself from taking a step back.
“E- Even I can understand a little!” You refuse to let your convictions amount to nothing. With a heavy heart you continue, “I was there when they gave their lives for… I saw it with my own eyes. Both of them loved the Hwarang. And they trusted their commander! If either of them saw what I am now, it would crush them.” 
“Crush them, huh?” At last, he seems to let go of a bit of the tension in his shoulders. They relax slightly as he looks off into the distance. “Do you believe it to be the survivor’s duty to carry on the will of the deceased?”
“I think so.”At least that’s what it feels as if you’re doing now. The reason you can’t back down, even if Kun feels compelled to yell at you, is because you know Jisung and Minhyung would have done the same. 
“Damn, guess this means all I have to look forward to in life is shouldering more burdens until I die.”
“Kun…”
He shakes his head and gives you a short, melancholic smile, “Sorry for yelling at you. You were right. You did know. There’s no point in me being irrational when our situation is already grim, huh? It wouldn;t look too great if there’s nowhere for the Chief to go when he gets out eventually.”
With that last statement, you see that he’s finally regained his composure, and you respond in kind by calming down, “I know I told you to stay strong, but please, don’t push yourself too hard. I noticed you’ve been running around during both day and night time.”
“Where do you have all this time to show concern for every person you meet?” Kun sighs out, “Once we leave here, if you so much as collapse on the way out, I’m leaving your ass behind. Brace yourself.” 
“Okay!”
You’re happy to have gotten through to him, even if it was just a courteous gesture. He begins walking again and you run right behind him, doing your best to keep up with the swiftness of his pace.  
At the entrance of the city, you regroup with Jeno and Shotaro, the two greeting you quickly. 
“Commander, I need to speak with you urgently,” Jeno says, looking frigid as he approaches Kun. “Please let me petition for the clemency of both the Chief and Sungchan! Surely the Goguryeo forces understand what killing Moon would detail. If we work hard, I’m sure we can find people to cooperate with us. So please–”
 Kun stares at Jeno, who’s bowed over in a sign of respect, and seems to take his suggestion into consideration. 
“...You beat me to it. I was going to say the same thing.”
“Commander! Then–”
“Osaki, I have a favor to ask you. Take her and head to Kyeju first.”
“What?!” You gasp out.
“We’re going to continue our fight for Taeil’s freedom. Your presence here is only a burden for us right now.” Earlier he’d given you the same instruction, albeit with a far more aggressive tone. But this time you can tell thoughtful consideration went into it. 
You’re worried, of course. But there isn’t anything more you can argue. 
“This is an order from your commander. We’ll meet up again soon so get out of here and stay sharp.” 
It felt strange to part from them, as if some piece of yourself is now missing– but you don’t have much time to harp on it as you meet up with other troops in Kyeju. 
You’re worried about what’s to become of Taeil, but perhaps because the situation seems grim, no one has brought it up.
May 1st, 666 – Outside of Kyeju, Kingdom of Silla Kun soon rejoined Shotaro and you as you resided in Kyeju, only after he’d settled his affairs for Taeil’s freedom in Ungjin first. Yuta had taken the main body of Hwarang soldiers to Koksan and then onto Bakjak to keep an eye on the Fury Corps. You have just left the small town with Wen Junhui’s men to hop onto the route to follow after him. 
After a while, you manage to meet up with some allied soldiers, but many of them look at you with a strange mixture of curiosity and fear. It’s unpleasant, to say the least.
“Those are the Hwarang, right? The murderers?”
“Yeah, noble dogs that  kill men for no reason– even their comrades! Best not to look at them for too long. You never know what might set them off.”
It isn’t difficult to hear the gossip that floats through the ranks. 
“They sound like a bunch of old wives spinning those stories!” Shotaro scoffs, turning to look at Kun, “Want me to keep them quiet for you?”
“No.” Kun shakes his head, sounding more irritated than usual, “They want to talk, let them talk.” 
“Are you alright?” You ask as you walk along, “You don’t look too well.”
“I’m fine.” He says but he clearly seems otherwise. His skin is a pale color, almost blue, and he looks exhausted. Marching during the day is hardly a pleasant walk for a Fury. 
Taeil is clearly at the forefront of his mind. And although you hate to admit it, he has a good reason to be on edge. 
“Excuse me, could you let me pass? Ah– apologies, oops…” Someone moves towards you from the back of the column of men, pushing his way through the rest of the marching soldiers. 
“Hello,” a man, no older than Kun, steps forward and offers a bow, “Are you Qian Kun? I’ve heard a great deal about you and the Hwarang.” 
“Who the hell are you?” Kun asks, puzzled.
“Pardon my rudeness, I’m still not fully functional with the language– my name is Wen Junhui, one of the commanders of the Tang forces. I’m sure I’ll be talking with the Hwarang a great deal in the future. It’s nice to meet you.” 
It’s strange, for the man who claimed to command the infantry of men, he looks more like the son of a wealthy merchant than a soldier. 
Kun snorts under his breath and turns away, leaving Junhui to look on for a moment longer. 
“Do you have business with Kun?” Shotaro asks.
“Ah, yes. I was hoping to hear stories about the Seorabeol attacks from the Commander of the Hwarang himself.”
“Sure you wouldn’t rather hear some ridiculous rumor from a drunk soldier?” Kun bites, “Seems like everybody here loves to gossip.”
“I apologize for them. We’ve been far from home for a while and they’ve only grown more undisciplined as time progressed.” Junhui shakes his head to continue his original plan, “At any rate, I came here to give you an overview of how our forces are being deployed. We have five thousand soldiers in the advance guard, main body and rear guard. As the highest ranking officer–” 
“Wen Junhui… The Wen Junhui who took back Hanseong a few months back?”
“That’s me,” he smiles.
“And you lost it.” 
“Yes, well… I suppose I did. It was a misstep of my forces and I take full responsibility for it. But I assure you that we will be taking it back, and keeping it this time.”
Kun looks as if he’s just swallowed something rotten. He’d only just lost his Chief and it seems as if this newcomer’s trying to force himself into Taeil’s place. No one, no matter the skill, can replace his friend. Still, Junhui seems to have been expecting to be rebuffed, and continues, showing no sign of being put off by Kun's behavior. 
“The advance guard is made up mostly of men from the Silla army. The rear guard, however, is composed of men from Tang. I’m thinking of promoting you to Deputy Commander in order to lead the advance guard. What do you say?” 
“Why?”
“I have experience leading my men. And am I wrong to think that the advance guard would take more kindly to a fellow countryman than an outsider?” Junhui speaks plainly, “Besides, there isn’t anyone on our side or theirs who hasn’t heard the name Qian Kun. I can’t think of anyone better suited.” His copious praise does nothing to thaw Kun, they just stare at each other for a few awkward moments. 
It’s painfully clear that the two of them don’t see eye to eye, and it cannot be a worse first impression. 
“Well,” Junhui claps his hands together, “I suppose I better be on my way. We’ll talk later, and go over some more in-depth plans.” Their conversation ends as one-sided as it had begun, and the Tang general disappears into the swarm of marching soldiers. 
Later that night, your group camps a short distance away from the rest of the force. Kun, sitting by the fire’s edge, beckons you and Shotaro over, “We need to talk.” The main bulk of the Hwarang forces are with Yuta heading even more northward, meaning that the only people in the camp were you, Shotaro, Kun and three dozen more Hwarang. “Remember what Junhui told us earlier?”
“About taking command of the advance guard?” Shotaro inquires, “What of it?”
“I’ve been thinking about what I want you guys to do. You can’t be in the advance guard, so I’ll have to send you off to fight with the main body or the rear guard.”
“So this means you’re going to take his offer?” Shotaro shifts as he speaks.
“Yes. You were in Seorabeol. You’d be a good commander for men who’ve never seen a real battle.”
“But…” A frown carves itself on the younger’s lips. Kun’s reasoning makes sense, but it doesn’t mean he has to like it.  It feels as if Shotaro had grown attached to the idea of fighting in the same unit as Kun. Perhaps the commander is insensitive for either ignoring this sentiment, or not acknowledging it at all. 
Shotaro sighs, resigning himself into a period of deep thought, looking up to Kun’s gaze, “Understood. Whatever you order me to do, I’ll do it. But first, I want you to tell me something. This doesn’t mean you’re planning to disband the Hwarang, does it? If I fight in this, it’ll be as a member of the Hwarang.”
It seems the two of you feel the same way. Kun’s hope may be flickering but yours isn’t.
“Fine. Whatever.” Kun seems disengaged.
“I should also point out that I think commanding soldiers is a little more than she can handle.” Shotaro adds, glancing over to you, “She doesn’t belong on the front line. She’s a page, not a soldier.” He rises to his feet, dusting the dirt from his knees, “Anyways, I’ll go and tell the others what you’ve decided.”
Kun and you are left alone with the crackling fire as Shotaro jogs back to the main encampment. He sighs and his shoulders drop. Suddenly he looks very, very tired.
“Why did you try to order us away?” The question leaves you before you can think it through.
He doesn’t answer, only tilts his head to look at the flecks of starlight dappling through the trees above. As the melancholy silence speaks, you nearly regret asking the question before he laments, “If I knew Taeil was coming back, then I could go out there ready to give my life to win. Just like Minhyung said– Taeil and I were the Hwarang. With him gone, there’s no way in hell I can carry all this on my own.”   
When he normally speaks to you, he is oft cruel and rude, you’ve never heard him sound so defeated before. 
“Yukhei was right, wasn’t he? Remember what he said when we decided to attack Hanseong? He said there was no way in hell Kim Yong would fund us without some sort of hidden agenda.” Kun huffs, “He was right. So was Jaehyun… You know who was the first to petition for a settlement between Goguryeo and our forces? Kim Yong.”
“...What?”
“He wanted to showcase our defeat as costly and an expenditure of life and resources. Make it abysmally clear that the war is funded on blood, and to keep his own money in his coiffers.” He laughs despondently and kicks at a rock by his foot, “Damn it, how couldn’t I see that coming? If I thought about it, that would’ve never slipped past me. I was desperate for Taeil to be off fighting big important battles, winning all sorts of glory…  But I let it all blind me, we were played and Taeil lost his spirit…” 
The Hwarang had put their lives on the line for the Kingdom. How could the King just let them be pawned around? 
“Noble or commoner– we all busted our asses to get where we are. Aren’t warriors meant to be the masters of the battlefield? What the hell have we been fighting for this entire time? Is anything I believed in still true? We believed that we were fighting for something, so no matter the shit we had to crawl through, we did it.  Turns out it was just a trench that just circles itself. What are we supposed to do now? What the hell am I supposed to believe in?”
Every word of his punctures you with pain. But the kingdom had betrayed them, their trust. The war had changed and it feels as if the Hwarang had been tossed aside. All that the Hwarang had done is fade away, what could Kun do to fix it? 
“You lost what you believed in,” you say quietly, “They think as long as you’re there to lead, they’ll be fine and refuse to show fear in front of you. They want you to see the kind of men they are, which means they’ll fight to the death if you tell them to.” If anything, you want to soothe his wounded soul a bit. “But if someone were to ask why I’m here… I’d say it’s because I believe in you.”
Perhaps that’s the wrong thing to say, all you’ve done is give him something more to worry about. 
Kun looks at you, but for once the light in his eyes is soft, “You’re right. If you lose sight of something the only person who can find it again is you. Besides, we’ve got a big fight coming up. Guess I should be thinking about how we’re going to win that, not whining about my problems.” With a small smile, he turns back to the stars.
You fall silent again, cicadas fluttering and chirping through the night being the only cacophony of sounds around you.  
“Are you really going to stick around?” He asks. You know he wants to go alone, but you can’t go with Shotaro, you both know that.
“Yes, I am.” Perhaps you don’t know how you can help him just yet, but you can hardly leave him alone. 
“Fine. Just stay out of my way.” 
“I know.” You sit there in the silence of night, you’re just about to return to your tent when he groans out in pain. Almost immediately you know what’s happening, your fears confirmed when his hair begins to turn white at the roots. Quickly you scramble to your feet, urging him to his and leading him to the shadow of a large tree where the nearby soldiers won’t be able to see him.  
“Damn it,” he curses through clenched teeth, “Why now?!”
With shaking hands you reach for your collar, and as he grasps your intent he grimaces. Kun takes a hold of your shoulders and roughly pulls you toward him, seconds later you feel a dull sting on the back of your neck and then the hot trickle of blood. 
His warm breath comes in pants across your bare skin, but after a time his ragged gasps for deliverance begin to steady. And slowly, his grip loosens. Then, without a word, he pulls away from you. 
“How long do you plan to keep letting me do this?” He mutters, as you turn to him, worry in his eyes.
“Forever,” you say simply, “As long as you need me, I’ll be here.” 
“You’re a stupid woman,” he sighs, “And I’m a man who’s lost sight of what makes him human. How can you just let me cut you open like that and drink your blood? What the hell are you thinking?”
“It’s alright, Kun. I really don’t mind.”
There’s nothing for him to say to that.
The next day, along the route to Hanseong, the news breaks.
“So, Goguryeo forces are pulling out of Hanseong?” Wen Junhui frowns, “That’s… unexpected.” He and Kun stop to talk over the news and their next move. 
“Unexpected? They’re cocky bastards that think we won’t try to retake the city.” Kun scoffs, “It’s the most opportune moment to take it back.” 
“I’m not against going into battle,” Junhui states, “We are leading an army, after all. But the main body and the rear guard are still on their way. All I’m asking is that you wait until they catch up with us. Attempting to lay siege to the city with the men we have is folly beyond folly. We should–”
Kun sighs, “This isn’t a theoretical scenario from one of your war manuals.”
“Sun Tzu isn’t just a war manual. The highest form of generalship is balking enemy plans; the next best in preventing enemy junctions,” Junhui argues, standing his ground, “After that, it’s attacking armies in the field, and the worst of all is besieging walled cities. Therefore, we should only lay siege as a last resort. Attacking head-on is foolish. If you’re determined to be foolish, the best you can do is make sure your army is in the best condition possible and–”
“Though we have heard of stupid haste in war, cleverness has never been seen associated with long delays! No kingdom benefits from prolonged warfare!” Kun offers his rebuttal, “Remember that one? He’s saying that it might get messy, but it’s better to end your battles quickly. Taking your sweet time just comes back to bite you in the ass.”
“Qian… Don’t do that.” Wen Junhui’s brow furrows, “I’m not asking you to wait long. They should be here in just a few days.”
“And we’re just meant to sit here twiddling our thumbs until the Goguryeo army shows up?” Kun frowns, “If they catch us unaware then we’re screwed, no two ways about it.” He must sense that he caught a nerve in the other as he pushes ahead, “You want to miss this opportunity, fine. I’ll just take the advance guard and capture Hanseong myself.”
“That’s suicide!” Junhui shouts as Kun snorts derisively. He clearly has no intention of taking his opinion. 
“I guess we’ll see. I’ll take Hanseong by tomorrow.” His lips pull back from his teeth in a feral grin, and he looks off in the distance toward Hanseong.
He isn’t being belligerent. He’s being reckless. With Kun like this, can you really win?
April 13th 666 - Hanseong, Kingdom of Goguryeo Hanseong is in turmoil. Your forces neared three thousand, while Hanseong’s barely had a thousand. And although the Silla forces easily outnumber your opponents, the guards are able to use their fortifications to great effect, fighting you to a standstill. Arrows fly, swords clash, and men scream in pain.
“We can’t keep this up,” Kun sighs out with crossed arms, “This is as good a time as any to attack the enemy lines.”   
“Attack?” You look toward him in disbelief, as a nearby soldier cries out, “Their fortifications–” 
“Can fall.” Kun says flatly, “An arrow or two won’t kill you.” The men around him are stunned into silence, never having imagined they would receive orders like this. Their commander, however, just stares back coldly. “What the hell did you come here to do? You’re here to fight a war. If you’re prepared to fight, you should be prepared to die. Am I wrong? So, when I give the word, you’re going to charge that line!”
The men before him pale, and many tremble. Eventually, one of them snaps, “I can’t do it! I don’t want to die here.”
No sooner had he turned to run, does Kun’s sword flash in the daylight, striking the soldier dead. The men watching swallow thickly. For a few moments they stay utterly silent. Commotion breaks out shortly afterward. 
“What is this?!”
“Is he crazy?!”
Kun lets his cold eyes slide slowly across their ranks, and slowly the mumbling ceases, “Anyone else want to run? If you’re too scared to fight, go ahead. Be my guest. But anyone who runs will die by my hand. So either I kill you… Or you take your chance out there. Up to you.” With one final scowl, he turns back to the battlefield, taking off across it.
He runs through the throng of bodies and hail of arrows, falling upon the men defending the main gate like a vengeful god. His sword drips with fresh blood, you stay in the shadows of the treeline waiting for him to return.  
Shotaro runs to the commander, grime and blood smeared across his face, “With another push we should be able to take the gate!”
“Great!” Kun shouts, “I believe in you Osaki!” 
As Kun effortlessly slices through the enemy, the mood among his men begins to change. A ripple goes through them, a surge of newfound energy to fight. You can’t hear him from the distance, but he shouts something over his shoulder and his soldiers fight with intense vigor. 
And soon after the sun passes its zenith, the city gates open, the news of it spreading like wildfire. 
The Silla forces sweep into the city soon after, finding relative ease when liberating the streets. Kun glances at you with a grin as Shotaro runs up to him.
“Commander! The men we sent to the town head’s home ran into trouble!”
“What?” Kun almost sounds confused, “We haven’t seen any real resistance so far.”
Shotaro shakes his head, “I’m unaware of the details. Should I go see…?”
“No. I’ll go.” Kun stops him, “I’m leaving you in charge here.”
“What would you like me to do?” You ask.
“Come with me,” he says simply, “Don’t want you wandering around. Might get hit by a stray arrow or something.  
And thus it was decided. You quickly follow after Kun, and even upon approaching the building, you can tell something is wrong. Inside, your men are dead on the floor, their bodies laid out like the spokes of a wheel, and at its hub… Lee Donghyuck.
“What are you doing here?” Kun asks, more nonchalant than you’d have thought. “Decided you’d take a vacation? You do know there’s a war out there, right? Or maybe you’re just hiding out here, hoping you won’t get hurt.”
“We were acting under orders from the King.” Xiao Dejun, whom you hadn’t seen upon your arrival, speaks out, “We are here to deliver a secret message. We did not expect to be drawn into battle and we certainly did not expect to encounter you here.”
“Huh,” Kun scoffs, “Gaesomun yells jamp and you leap. You sure are dedicated.” 
“Well, I didn’t think I’d see you again so soon, Qian…” Donghyuck leers with a snide grin.
“And I didn’t think you were so anxious to get your ass beat again. Don’t worry though, I’m happy to oblige.”
Donghyuck grinds his teeth and draws his sword at his hip, “Killing you will erase the humiliation I suffered at your hands. You and your dogs have been a thorn in my side since Wonweol. Today, I will have my revenge.”
“... Sounds as if you’ve got this covered,” Dejun sighs, stepping back once more, “He’s all yours.” 
Kun just as easily draws his sword, “Guess the face wasn’t enough, maybe if I take an arm you’ll get the message.” He soars across the room at Donghyuck, their blades rattling against one another as Donghyuck block’s the commander’s strike. Then, the demon pushes back and Kun is thrown across the hall. 
“You’re not getting away,” Donghyuck says coolly, his hair turning stark white, just as Kun’s had done at the beginning of the battle. In the blink of an eye, he leaps after his opponent, whipping his sword in a quick slash. Kun brings up his blade at the last second before the strike could wound him. 
“You’re slow,” Donghyuck taunts, “Your movements lack finesse. Don’t tell me that killing humans has tired you out? Last time you said you were a Demon…” Their blades locked together, Kun’s begins to shake under the pressure of the other’s force. 
Donghyuck’s right, though, Even with his Fury abilities, Kun is slower than before, too unfocused. 
“Ah, I see,” the Demon’s eyes flicker to the open door for a moment, “The sun’s still out. You don’t like it much, do you?” He chuckles, “Don’t worry, I won’t go easy on you just because you’re weak. After all, a warrior always gives all he can, no matter the situation. That is your code, isn’t it?” 
“Damn you!” Kun jumps backwards, but not fast enough to escape Donghyuck’s blade. It arcs down across the Hwarang’s chest, blood erupting from the gash and splattering to the floor. Kun drops to his knees, skidding across the hard wooden panels panting heavily as blood blooms across his robes and pools on the floor below him. 
Agonizing seconds pass as both you and he wait for the blood to stop, yet it continues to fall through his fingers clenched to the robes hanging from the wound. “What the hell is this?!” Kun asks through clenched teeth as he stares daggers at Donghyuck standing before him. 
Donghyuck laughs, almost as if Kun had told him a joke, “What’s the matter? Not healing like you should? This,” his wrist flicks upward to show off his blade, which almost looks to be faintly glowing, “is Hwangun’s Blade. It’s been passed down through my family for generations, but… no one had ever thought to test it on a Demon. This is an excellent chance to see what it can do. And you know what? I can use it to put down a fake Demon.”
He smirks, giving the impression that he’s figured this victory is a foregone conclusion. 
“You must be pretty desperate if you’re willing to grab your family’s magic sword. Really need something like that to take on a fake Demon?” Kun gives his own taunting laugh, but Donghyuck’s grin doesn’t falter. 
“You humiliated me for the first time in my life. Nothing is too much if it will send you to hell.” With another flick of his wrist, Donghyuck sends droplets of gore spraying down onto the floor, “Your abilities can’t heal any wounds from this blade. You became a Fury to defeat me, but now that sacrifice means nothing.” 
“So, tell me if I’ve got this right. All I have to do is avoid getting cut by that thing? Hell, before I became a Fury, all I did was dodge swords. This’ll be easy.”
“Does your impudence know no bounds?” The Demon scoffs, “Fine. I’ll put your short lived defiance to the test.” His blade shimmers a blue-white and seems to shiver with his murderous intent. The air is thick, feeling like a struggle to just breathe. 
Donghyuck slashes downwards toward Kun, who’s able to dodge out of the way in time, bringing up his own sword to strike back. But when it arcs upward, instead of hitting flesh, Kun’s sword cuts through air. In tandem with the strikes, Donghyuck moves too fast for the bare eye to see, Kun’s margin for error becoming slimmer and slimmer. With another dodge, the Demon slams his riposte into the Hwarang’s shoulder. Kun’s robe is torn away, displaying a fresh wound. 
“Good… You’re overthinking on how you might kill me,” Donghyuck smirks, “But I want to see more. I want to see your face when you realize that you can’t kill me and that I will win!”
Blood pours from him, but Kun brings up his sword to catch Hwangun. Teeth clenched, you know that he’s lost far too much blood to carry on for much longer. Donghyuck kicks Kun back and as he does, the commander’s hair returns to its natural hue.   
“What the hell?!” Kun cries out, still in a defensive stance.
“Reached your limit, I see,” the Demon chortles, inching closer, “Even a false Demon is better than this pathetic existence! You might as well be an insect.” His laugh echoes through the hall, gloating over the near unconscious Kun, “I want to hear you cry! Scream! Beg me for your life! You and your filth have stood in my way for too long. I’ll kill you and the Hwarang!”
Kun’s head twitches, “Kill…the Hwarang? You?” It’s almost as if he’s keeping himself upright with sheer force of will at this point. “After we left Taeil and the Hwarang fell to me, I felt like there was no way I could do all that by myself. I was just about ready to give it up.” Suddenly, the hair on his head shifts back to its demonic white, “...But now, when you say you want to erase everything we did… I’ll be goddamned if I let you destroy the Hwarang!” 
Ichor continues to fall from him and you know that if he’s to continue like this he’ll most certainly die.
“Kun, no!” You cry out, “If you don’t stop you’re going to die!”
His eyes flick to you and you can already see the resolution in his gaze, then he gives you a grin before looking back to Donghyuck, “You really think I care about how much of my future I’ve gotta burn to get this bastard? I can’t let him kill me here. I can’t let this bastard and his damn sword get the best of me now!” 
Relaxed now, Donghyuck speaks once more, “You’re practically dead already. What do you intend to do? This charade is pathetic.” Almost lazily, he swings his sword again. 
Kun cries out in pain, not having the strength to lift his sword entirely to block the blow. Then Donghyuck’s sword slams into his right shoulder. Kun’s clothes are soaked in blood, his skin the color of parchment. 
“I hoped you might be entertaining, but I suppose it’s time for me to say goodbye now. Shame you don’t have enough energy to talk. I miss that dry wit,” Donghyuck sighs, “What’s the matter? Can’t hold your sword anymore? Where’s that warrior spirit?”
Even though he struggles to draw breath, Kun musters what little strength he has left to reach for his sword. The point of the blade tips and weaves in the air as blood pours from his body, but he stands. Donghyuck lifts his sword slick with the commander’s blood, and smiles. 
“At last! I can kill you with my own hands and erase the humiliation you gave me!” 
Before he can land another blow, the building shakes as an ear splitting crash barrels through somewhere on the estate. Smoke rapidly fills the room, making it hard to see.
“What is this?!” Donghyuck spits, distractedly turning from Kun to find the root of the interruption. 
“Fire! Fire!” Cries scream out from deep in the building, and you can ascertain that one of the trebuchets aligning the fortified walls had been turned against the city for some reason or another in a last act of defense. 
The fire from the lit fodder spreads quickly, roaring around the room and licking at the sides of the hall. Black smoke pours into the room, irritating your eyes and throat. Even as the room plunges into a near unbearable heat, the two men don’t lower their swords. 
It’s only when the ceiling begins to give way does Donghyuck remark, “Damn it, this place is falling apart.” Not wanting to endanger himself, he shoves his sword back into its scabbard angrily, glaring across the smoldering wreckage at Kun. “I’ll let you go this time. We’ll finish this duel another day. And you will die.”
He disappears shortly thereafter and you run to Kun, “Are you alright?!” 
Waxen skin and face writhing in pain, he doesn’t respond as he drops to the floor. And as he does, the near forgotten Dejun walks toward you from his corner, unbothered by the flames around him. 
“The Demon clans no longer intend to involve themselves in your governmental squabbles.”
“Why?” Kun asks, sweat beading on his forehead. 
“We owed favors to Goguryeo. We feel those have now been repaid.” Dejun shrugs, “Besides, even you must know that they will soon fall, regardless of the efforts of my kin.” 
You spot a bitter smile creeping along Kun’s lips, “... Yeah.” 
“And I suppose you intend to watch that ship sink?” Dejun asks, “Silla never gave your Hwarang the recognition it so desired, and pawned you off when they had nothing to lose. Why do you still fight?” The truth of his words drive a knife into Kun’s heart, and you see his face fall. 
“We’re knights of the Crown, we fight for them no matter what, right?” Kun says with ragged breaths, “What I’m fighting for now isn’t Hanseong or Pyongyang, or any of those bastards that call themselves ministers. What I– no– What we’re fighting for is the bond in our hearts. The bond that we joined the Hwarang with.”
His hand clenches to his chest and he lets out a small ‘fuck’ before continuing, “It’s not easy, not by a long shot, but… I’d feel like a real asshole if I died before Taeil came back.” 
Dejun closed his eyes while Kun spoke, he now stands silent, “If Donghyuck chooses to involve himself with either of you again, he will have betrayed the moral code that binds all of our kind. He will no longer have the support of the clans. He will be on his own.” He looks to the building around him, “I imagine this will be of little concern to him, but I ask you to hear his mind when he next tries you, he is not doing so at the behest of the Demon clans. He is, I fear, your problem now.”
Then, he turns and disappears. As you look to where he once stood, you hear Kun thud to the floor, collapsing from relief or exhaustion, you cannot tell. But, he’s fallen unconscious, and if you cannot escape soon, you’ll burn to death. 
“Hello?! Are you here?!” A figure bursts into the hall, shrouded in smoke but with a voice you recognize.
Shotaro had come to the rescue in your most dire hour. He quickly helps you lift Kun so you can shoulder the weight of his body together as you leave the estate.  
Hanseong, the town Kun had fought tooth and nail to overtake, only remained in Silla custody for a few days. As an army of Goguryeo soldiers came within the following week to recapture the city, leaving your commander’s mission for naught. After the battle, Wen Junhui’s army, along with the remaining Hwarang, set off to Koksan. Kun had somehow miraculously survived, but by no means has he recovered. For days he drifts in and out of consciousness, settling in at a small residence in Kyeju for him to recover. 
April 20th, 666 - Kyeju, Kingdom of Silla Since you’d arrived in Kyeju, you’d buisied yourself with taking care of Kun. As a Fury, most normal means of healing and medicine have little to no effect on him. So, most of your nursing consists of fervently hoping that his natural strength and tenacity would bring him through. Fortunately, your prayers begin to pay off and in time his wounds begin to heal. 
Although those made by Donghyuck’s blade did not do so easily, or quickly. You find yourself thinking of the battle of Hanseong. After watching Kun, many of the reluctant soldiers came around to clash swords with the enemy. They had told him it was an honor to fight alongside the Hwarang, for they were true warriors. 
You replay that fated battle several times over the course of your day, you’re just about to do it again as you open the door to Kun’s room, set to change his bandages. Yet, you don’t have the chance, as when you peer in, you see him sitting at his desk. He’s healed enough to move and speak without pain, but he’s still meant to be confined to his bed. 
“You shouldn’t be up,” you say quickly, walking inside and shutting the door behind you, “When I said you were healthy enough to get up, I didn’t mean you were healthy enough to work!”
“It’ll be only a minute,” he murmurs, looking over a few papers before him, “I’m going back to bed as soon as I finish this.”
“You nearly died! You need rest!” You rush to him, setting the bandages down on the tabletop. 
“Died?” He laughs once, dryly, “Me? Hah. That was nothing. Barely a scratch.” 
“Barely a– Do you know how long I’ve been taking care of you?!”
“Fine, fine,” he relents with a sigh. “Just a bit more reading, it’s all I ask.”
You sigh too, reaching for his blanket he’d strewn aside when he awoke. Moving to stand behind him, you drape it over his shoulders, “At least let me put this on you. You’re going to catch a chill.”  
“Hm, I’m sure even if I said I don’t want it, you wouldn’t listen to me.” 
“I’m glad you see how this works,” you say with a smile, “Now, as soon as that’s done, it’s straight back to bed.” 
At last he turns to look at you, his face quirked in a small, bitter smile, “Alright, fine. Sorry for the trouble.”
“Huh?” You stare back at him intently.
“Guess I should be thanking you and Shotaro, huh? Well… I appreciate what you did. Thanks.” His thanks are rarely unaccompanied by cynicism, sarcasm or outright derision but this is different. Noticing your baffled expression he speaks again. “Something wrong? Did I say something funny?”
“Oh! No no no,” you quickly assure him, “It’s not that.” It’s more you’ve never seen him act so nice. 
After that, you leave him to his work, checking back an hour later to make sure that he’s asleep and not working himself to the bone. Once doing so, you return to your quarters for another few, quiet hours, before a visitor arrives in the night.
“I thought I’d come and pay him a visit…” You hear the voice of Wen Junhui speak out as you approach the common area, you also note Shotaro standing next to him.
“He’s resting at the moment–” You begin, but stop when you hear movement behind you. 
“Sir–!” Shotaro says, rushing to Kun’s side, “I’m glad to see you standing! For a while, I really wasn’t sure what was going to happen.” His eyes begin to tear up and he blinks rapidly to clear them. 
“C’mon, don’t give me that,” Kun gives a short laugh, “You really think I’d die so easily?”
“I’m sorry sir, you’re right,” he rubs his hand across his face awkwardly, trying to brush away the tears that refuse to stop forming. 
“Kun,” Junhui says solemnly, “I’m going to be honest with you. You fought like a Demon back in Hanseong, I’ll give you that. Morale is through the roof. The whole army won’t stop talking about you. But your actions were dangerous and idiotic,” the once calm demeanor of the general turns angered. “You are a commanding officer, not a soldier! You don’t belong on the front line!” 
“General Wen, he’s only just recovered… Don’t you think you’re being a bit too harsh–” Shotaro tries to quell the other’s discontent. 
“No! I’m going to give my piece, I won’t let him slide out of this one!” Junhui shouts, “Listen to me, Qian Kun. Combining our men isn’t just about new clothes and new titles, we have to change about how we think about war. We have to learn new tactics. The commander charging at the front of the army does not show that we are improving our strategy!”
Flustered at this point, Junhui struggles hard to keep his composure, “If the soldiers are the hands and feet, then their commanding officer is the head. Without a head, the body is a useless mess! This war will be lost if we succumb to our own pride!”
Kun’s eyes go wide. The words similarly mirror one of the last things that Minhyung had said to him. Keeping his head on so that the body can move forward… 
“Minhyung’s ghost back to haunt me,” Kun sighs out with a weighted smile, a faraway look in his eyes. 
“Is something funny?” Junhui frowns, “This is serious! Don’t you understand how worried I was about you? Hell, how worried the whole army was about you?!”
For a few moments, Kun simply stares at him. 
“Say what you want!” Junhui stands his ground, albeit a bit taken aback at the commander’s attitude, “It won’t change my mind!”
“You’re right, Wen. Sorry for worrying you.” He follows his surprisingly genuine apology with a similarly surprising bow.  
Junhui has clearly prepared himself for a variety of reactions from Kun, but this had been none of them. For several moments he stands there, too flabbergasted to speak. 
“My apologies to you too, Shotaro. I hear you helped carry me all the way here.”
“Oh no!” Shotaro shakes his head, “No, it was nothing. Anything for you, sir.” 
June 19th, 666 – Koksan, Kingdom of Silla Summer blooms from the remnants of spring in full fury. Rumors and news about the intense fighting floats in and out of the town, and you grow uneasy thinking about the loss of lives on each side. In the subsequent weeks following Wen Junhui’s visit, he’s once again able to take Hanseong and keep a steady hand over keeping it in Silla's grasp. And although he hasn’t completely healed, Kun has decided to leave Kyeju as soon as he is well enough to march with Junhui who’s now stationed in Koksan. 
The way there seems longer than you'd ever thought possible. At last, you’d caught up with the main body of the Hwarang. 
Yuta’s at the door to greet you the moment you arrive at the estate. 
“Commander,” Yuta says with a small smile, “I’m grateful to see you alive.”
“Glad to see you’re alright too, I hear you’ve been doing well.”  
Although Yuta looks relieved to be reunited with Kun, he frowns and rubs his hand to his forehead. Perhaps fatigue from the battles occurring is beginning to get to him. 
Kun looks past him to the people standing behind him, “Jeno, Sungchan, nice to see you’re still around. Was starting to get worried about you two.” Despite their commander’s voiced appreciations, both wear glum expressions. 
It’s Sungchan who begins to shake before breaking down into tears, his voice quivering violently, “You entrusted me with Chief’s safety, b-but– I wasn’t strong enough! I couldn’t protect him!”
Although hearing his words, you cannot get yourself to grasp their meaning. For him to be this distraught can only mean one thing. 
“We have been told that at the end of last month that Taeil was… beheaded in Pyongyang.” Yuta steps in after Sungchan fails to compose himself, being ushered aside and consoled by Jeno. 
‘Beheaded.’ You swallow at the word. Taeil had been killed like a common criminal, and you know it would have been pure humiliation for him. 
“Hm, didn’t even let him kill himself,” it almost seems as if Kun had expected this. His voice is controlled and unsurprised, but within his eyes you can see a bottomless, yawning despair. 
“It’s my fault he died!” Sungchan exclaims, “Please commander, I deserve to die as well!”
“I as well!” Jeno adds, “I begged you to let me fight for his freedom, but I– I wasn’t successful! I’m a failure!”  
“You idiots! Look around you,” Kun frowns, “There’s no goodman way we have a single Hwarang left to spare! If you’re so prepared for death, then don’t give me your cheap words. Prove yourselves on the battlefield!”
The two fall silent after a quick, “Yes sir.”
Later that night, both Taeyong and Jaemin come to visit Kun.
As members of the Fury Corp, they had been resting when you’d arrived earlier in the day. 
“Your arrival has the men in something of an uproar,” Taeyong muses, “It woke me somewhat earlier than usual.” 
“I heard you got hurt pretty bad, Commander. Didn’t think we’d see you again so soon,” Jaemin says, almost scanning for wounds on the elder.
“Well, I couldn’t just sit on my ass once I heard there were battles happening all over the place,” Kun says, sounding calm and relaxed. You know that isn’t how he’s feeling on the inside though. If you have been feeling depressed since learning of Taeil’s passing, you cannot begin to comprehend how he must be feeling. 
“We should be on our way then, our work begins at night, after all,” Taeyong notes and begins to head for the door. Jaemin nods and heads after him before Kun speaks up. 
“Jaemin, do you think you can tell Yuta to come by?”
“Huh?” Jaemin looks back, “Uh, sure… I’ll go and get him now.” Before he leaves he says one more thing to Kun, “I know you only just got here. But you should really rest tonight.”   
With both of them gone, the room falls into an awkward silence. Kun hasn’t told you to leave, but it seems unlikely that he’ll start talking to you either. Just as you’re about to break the quiet, Yuta opens the door and steps inside.
“I heard you had business with me. Can I help you?”
Without even waiting for him to settle in, Kun says, “From now on, I’ll be commanding from the front line.”
A strangled gulp treks down your throat as he says this out of almost nowhere. If he were to fight on the front line, the violence would be intense and he still hadn’t fully healed. 
“Do you intend to die in battle?” Yuta asks simply.
“No,” Kun shakes his head, “I won’t go out that easily. You’ve been out there. Only right for me to take that burden off you, right?” 
His presence would raise morale among the men but if he died, the Hwarang dies with him. 
“You raise an excellent point, sir. If you mean to take my place, however,” the air grows thick as Yuta’s hand falls to his sword, “I must ask you to defeat me first. If you cannot best me, then only death awaits you on the front lines.”  
“Getting a little full of yourself without me, huh?” Kun’s lips turn upward into a grin as his sword slides from its scabbard. 
“You shouldn’t be doing this!” You cry out as Yuta’s blade is also released, the blade glinting in the glow of the lanterns.
“Stay out of this!” Kun says and locks eyes with Yuta. Seconds linger as they remain unmoving, just then they leap towards one another, swords struggling against one another. After a bit, Kun is thrown backwards to sprawl across the floorboards. 
“What?!” He looks surprised. Even only partially healed, he still has far greater strength than a human, and he isn’t the type to go easy on a friend. 
“This war is not so easy that you might rush to the front line without your full strength,” Yuta says and as you look back at him your eyes grow wide.
“Yuta…” With his now reddened eyes and white hair, there’s no doubt that he’s a Fury. “You drank the pimul?”
“Don’t worry about me, I made my own decision.” The simple fact that he’s decided this path says more about the battles he’s been fighting than words ever can. Yuta looks to Kun, who’s rising to his feet, “I understand why you wish to fight, that is why I cannot allow you to.” He straightens himself and sheaths his sword, his hair returning to normal. “Perhaps you might be able to forget your pain in the midst of battle, but I cannot afford to let you do that. You cannot be permitted to turn a blind eye to our problems.”
Kun slowly puts his sword away, “Because I’m the Chief now?”
“Because you’re the only one who can unify the Hwarang.” After hearing that, Kun sighs, only allowing Yuta to continue. “Leave the front line to us. You, Kun, should remain here and plan our strategies.” 
“Fine. The front line’s yours until my wounds heal.” 
An honest, “Thank you” leaves Yuta, and then he turns to you. “I’m leaving him in your care. Don’t let him out of your sight until he’s healthy again.”  
You nod and give him what you hope to be a reassuring smile. He inclines his head to you, turns to Kun to give a short bow, then leaves. As soon as the door closes, Kun’s face darkens and his brows draw together. 
“Damn it… He’s gotten to the point where he doesn’t trust me and thinks I need you as a babysitter.”
“He’s just worried about you, that’s all,” you try to justify Yuta’s actions. 
Kun gives a bitter laugh, then stops suddenly. He gulps out a noise and clutches his stomach in pain, his body and hands shaking as his hair and eyes begin to change color.  With the bloodlust taking hold, he begins to groan out in pain. 
“This way,” you quickly take his arm and lead him to a room off of the main hall. In the open, anyone is privy to catch him. 
As he settles in the room, you set out towards him, and he has a look in his eyes as if he already knows what your next move is. You tug at your collar, loosening it like you’d done before. He leans toward you and you feel a sharp prick on your neck, you stay as still as you can as he bites down onto you. His hot breath panting along your neck, drinking slowly as he begins to calm. 
Eventually, he pulls back. There’s pain on his face but not from the bloodlust. 
“This can’t go on forever…” His face turns upward into a half sour smile, “You. Me. This war. Everything…”
“Kun?” His eyes are distant and he doesn’t seem to hear you. You can’t describe it but something feels strange, wrong, even. 
September 6th, 666 – Koksan, Kingdom of Silla By the time Kun’s injuries heal, it’s early autumn. Battles still rage along the fronts, and Silla inches nearer and nearer towards its goal. Kun hasn’t received any orders of late, but you feel that that’s about to change when you hear Shotaro storming down the hallway.
You’re settled in the main room with Kun, Taeyong, Jaemin, Jeno and Sungchan when the doors burst open, Shotaro shouting, “I have news from Wen Junhui! He says were to launch an offensive against Pyongyang.”
“Pyongyang? That’s the capital….” Jeno says seriously, glancing towards Kun.
In other words, this may be the push to finally close in on Goguryeo. 
“What now then?” Sungchan looks to Kun as well.
“We’ll need to get there as soon as possible. No doubt Junhui has some elaborate plan to route out their forces.” You haven’t seen Kun this excited in a while, and the others in the room pick up on his energy.  
“Our ships have already been sent to Ongjin, they will be able to converge on Pyongyang once the situation up north has settled.” 
“Then I should go to Ongjin first,” Taeyong says, “We should establish a stronghold for when the main body of men arrives.” 
“Isn’t it a bit dangerous to have our representative be someone from the Fury Corps?” You postulate to the group.
“My father’s family is from Ongjin, you know.” Taeyong says quietly, “I have a few connections there. I feel I am most suited to lead the advance guard. There’s… Something else that’s been bothering me as well.”
“Bothering you?” You question but all he does in response is nod and smile. 
“Taeyong… you’re supposed to be dead, aren’t you?” Jaemin interrupts, “Seems like that might be an issue.”
“A minor detail,” he waves it off, “easily dealt with.”
“In that case, he’s probably the best choice,” Shotaro murmurs. 
“No,” Kun disagrees, “The Fury Corps isn’t cut out for that. You still can’t stand up during the day.” 
“It’s difficult, certainly, but not impossible.” Taeyong argues, “I don’t see any reason to just follow behind the rest of the army, and I’d be glad to push myself for this.”
You don’t doubt his ability to do that, but you do question the validity of his motives. 
“There’s… a bit more to his message,” Shotaro says after Kun and Taeyong have been staring at each other for a moment. “Junhui will be leading his men to Tagok Pass in hopes of stalling the Goguryeo reinforcements. I believe he means to buy time so that our allies can sack the city without interference. But…”
“The pass is on the front line right now,” Jaemin drums his fingers along the hilt of his sword. “I understand what he’s trying to do, but I don’t think it’s going to be as easy as he thinks it’ll be.” 
“That’s a good point,” Jeno sighs, “The enemy’s getting desperate, and we don’t know what else they’ve got up their sleeves.”
“If we want Junhui to come back alive, we need to send some reinforcements to go along with him,” Kun ascertains. 
“I disagree.” Taeyong frowns. “If we are to win in Pyongyang, we must arrive there at full strength.” 
“Are you saying we should abandon Junhui then?” Yuta asks.
“Well, if both of our forces are wiped out by Goguryeo, there is hardly any point at all.” 
The men all shoot glances at one another, formulating their own thoughts and responses before Yuta speaks once more, “I will remain with Wen. Without their aid in previous battles none of us would be here. I will go to Tagok Pass. Kun, please take the rest of the men to Ongjin.” 
“Yuta, you–” Kun’s eyes grow wide.
“Then I’ll go and prepare to depart.” Before giving Kun a chance to respond, Taeyong stands quickly and leaves the room.
Jaemin doesn’t seem particularly happy about the way things have gone either, and after a moment of furious thought, he stands as well, “I guess I’ll go with him. Don’t really want to let him out of my sight, you know.”
 “Yeah,” Kun nods, “That’s probably smart.” 
“Be careful, Jaemin,” you say as he walks past you. He gives you a small smile and a wink, then dashes out the door after Taeyong. 
“Osaki,” Kun looks at the man still at the door, “I need you to go and tell Junhui what we’ve decided.” 
“Understood,” Shotaro says quickly, “I’ll be off as soon as I can.” 
Once he leaves, Yuta turns to Kun. Whether or not he was waiting for the room to be cleared, you’re unsure. 
“Please survive. No matter what happens.”
“What’s the matter?” His brow furrows as he looks to the other, “That came from nowhere.” 
“In the Hwarang, you and Taeil upheld the path of a true warrior.” Even when slanted by their own kingdom, they had never compromised what they stand for. “Our standard of truth is a banner for everyone who fights. We lead the way.”
Yuta and Kun look at one another silently, before Yuta continues. “As the man who made the Hwarang into what it has become, it must be your duty to carry that standard. Every Hwarang before you and after is relying on that.”
“You make it sound so easy.” Kun replies with his thin lipped grin. “I’ll promise you this though, I’ll stick around until the Hwarang’s dead, or I am.”
“Thank you, Chief.” Yuta smiles, eventually turning to you, “I leave Kun in your care.”
The words are few but hold great emotion behind them, “We’ll be fine. I’m sure of it… After all, I don’t think he could die even if someone killed him. I’ve seen him on the verge of death many times, but he always pulls through. So,” your jaw locks and you look directly into Yuta’s eyes, “Please don’t die, Yuta.”
The battle at Tagok Pass is sure to be an intense one. Many lives, you’re sure, are going to be lost.  
“I won’t die even if I get killed?” Kun’s eyebrow piques, “That’s quite a statement. If you’ve got time to worry about me, maybe you oughta be worrying about yourself too, Yuta.” He’d said it as a joke but there’s no mistaking his underlying sincerity. 
“I won’t die easily either. After all, I will be fighting in the name of the Hwarang.” Yuta says calmly and then addresses you, “Thank you for your kind gesture.” 
And so, you accompany Kun to Ongjin. He’s still gravely concerned about Yuta, thus he’d ordered Shotaro to remain alongside him at Tagok Pass. LEaving them both turns out to be much more difficult than you’d imagined. All you can do is pray that they survive, and that you will meet again someday.  
 December 1st, 666 – Ongjin, Kingdom of Silla As winter takes hold, the cold wind blows down on the main body of the Hwarang as they arrive in Ongjin. The trip had been impeded by several small snowstorms, but now upon your arrival a new problem is encountered: Taeyong and the Fury Corps were nowhere to be found. Jaemin, too, had been unheard from.  
From the townspeople in Ongjin, you hear disturbing rumors that murder has been on the rise in recent weeks. 
Upon reaching the regional minister’s house, you’re met with a man who splits a grin as soon as he sees Kun. “Long time no see, Qian. How are you?”
“I’m glad to see you’re doing well, Xu.”
Later on, you learn that this man is Xu Minghao, the Tang navy’s second-in-command. When the Yamoto forces had fired upon Sabi some years earlier, Minghao had been in command of the Tang ships that aided the Silla forces on land. While Kun hadn’t been at the battle, he was able to speak with and befriend the man when he visited Seorabeol some weeks later. 
“Have you already heard about Taeil?” Minghao frowns,as Kun nods. “I apologize for having been unable to help. Your kingdom has truly lost a great man.”  
“He would’ve been happy to hear you say that,” Kun says with a bitter smile, “But he wouldn’t want us to stand around crying about him. He’d want us to get to work. Can you give me a rundown of what we’re working with?”
“Unfortunately I don’t have the greatest news,” Minghao says, “While we’ve secured the city, there is something… wrong occurring. I have requested a meeting with the newly implemented officials but I haven’t received any form of response. To top it off, there’s a suspicious group of men running around Ongjin. Well, there are rumors, at least.”
“Suspicious how?”
“Well murders have increased, and a few rumors report the assailiants running back to the minister’s home.” 
Suspicious men running around, possibly murdering civilians… Taeyong and the Fury Corps unreachable… It isn’t hard to put two and two together. 
Kun and you lock eyes, no doubt thinking the same thing. 
“If this continues we may become sidetracked here from our main goal,” Minghao states, “Perhaps if we could arrest these murders and restore peace in this area…”
“Minghao, think you could leave the murders to me?” The other man opens his mouth to protest, but something in Kun’s gaze makes him change his mind and he nods. 
“Alright, I’ll leave this one to you. No more questions from me.” 
Once Minghao returns to his men, you turn to Kun, “Do you think it’s Taeyong…?”
“Can’t say,” Kun sighs out breathily, “You heard the same things I did. No way to know for sure but if it is… I’ll have to kill him.”
“Kun…”
“He got pretty freaked out when he heard about where a Fury's power comes from. Might be he’s pretty depressed right now. Maybe crazy.” He shakes his head and looks to the minister’s house, “Strange things are afoot in Ongjin. We can’t be careless.” 
December 2nd, 666 - Ongjin, Kingdom of Silla The next day, Kun begins his investigation. Despite your attempts to convince him that he still needs rest, not the stress of a murder investigation, he presses on. And so, that is how you find yourself lounging around the rooms the Hwarang are occupying while Kun goes off on rounds with the rest of the men.
You’re engrossed in reading over some medical papers Namekawa had left you with when you receive an unexpected visitor. 
“Where were you this whole time?!” The papers drop from your grasp as Na Jaemin steps into the room, “We couldn’t contact you, we were all so worried…”
“Do you know where Kun is?” He doesn’t answer your question, but rather jumps straight to the chase. 
“He’s off doing rounds at the minister’s estate…” 
“Ah,” Jaemin looks a bit crestfallen, “Can you give him a message for me? I can tell you everything since we got here. Just make sure you pass it on to him.”
You gulp, waiting for him to open up. “The minister isn’t being cooperative. Chances are they're being pressured by the enemy somehow. At least that's what Taeyong thinks. So, we looked around a little more and while we were doing that we found out that Heo is actually here.”
“What?!” You cry out at the unexpected revelation. Your father had been forced to do research on the Furies by the revivalists before the war broke out, or at least that's what you thought. 
“Yeah… and… he seems to be leading a unit of Furies for the Goguryeo forces.” Jaemin frowns, “Well we figured we could just let that slide so we started watching their Furies, you know, where they go and stuff and well… I saw Taeyong meeting with Heo.”
Jaemin explains that Taeyong told him they'd be more likely to get spotted if they moved together and went off on his own. This is pretty peculiar on its own but sometime after they split up Jaemin witnessed Taeyong meeting with your father. 
“I don’t know anymore… I don’t know what Taeyong is thinking.”
“It doesn’t mean that Taeyong is connected with Goguryeo, does it?” Your brow furrows. 
“If that were the case then there wouldn't be a need for him to lie to me though, right?” Jaemin says frustratedly, “Doesn't act like he's got any plans to contact the rest of the Hwarang. I just didn't know what to do…” 
You’re not sure what else to say and just before you open your mouth you hear a commotion happening at the entrance of the building. The door to your room is kicked open and several strange men suddenly leap inside. 
“Who the hell are they–?! Shit!” Jaemin shouts as they unsheathe their swords and lunge after him. He dodges the attack easily drawing his own sword as he moves. He strikes out at one of the men before he has a chance to recover. The man laughs and the spot where Jaemin had struck him is beginning to heal immediately. Suddenly, the man's eyes begin to grow a deep crimson you understand what you're up against.
“Furies…!” 
“Get behind me!” Jaemin reaches out and grabs your wrist, pulling you backwards.
“Now, there’s no need for that,” a new voice says from the entrance. You feel your eyelids footer incredulously after hearing a man's voice.  It's familiar… nostalgically so. 
“Father?!” You’re frozen in place as Jaemin continues to fight the Furies. 
“What the hell!? Who are these guys! It's broad daylight! How are they moving swiftly?!”Although he's Clearly they're superior regards to swordsmanship, he's outnumbered and the daylight had weakened him. He's slow and his strikes are unsure. 
Your father maintains his cool composure, and he mutters under his breath as he observes the events, “Aren't they wonderful? Furies no longer restrained by the cycles of day and night.”
“You…” You stare at him, mouth agape, “You did this?”
“Of course, my child. I am unsure if the news has reached you yet but I was captured by the Goguryeo Army, and in this captivity I continued to research the pimul.”
“Father– you need to stop them!” You look to your friend fighting, “At this rate he’ll–” 
Heo Jinsang’s eyes widen as if he’s only just remembered and he looks over to Jaemin with a smile. “Ah, yes. I don’t know how to thank you. Without you, it would have taken much longer to find my daughter.”
“You followed me?!” Jaemin spits through grit teeth. 
Ignoring him, your father looks back to you and speaks with a soft voice, “I’ve come to get you. At last, we’ll be able to restore our clan.” 
“Clan…? You mean the Heo family?”
“With these superior Furies, restoring the glory of our clan will be child’s play.” Heo laughs, “Once the kingdoms bear witness to the potential of these breakthroughs, they cannot ignore us! We can even wipe out the Demon clans who rejected our plea for help, avenging our kin!”
“You’re planning on using Furies to restore the Heo lineage to power?” 
“Yes, I am. Everything I have done was for you.” His voice evokes the same tone he had used to speak to you when you were a child. You shake your head to combat it and his eyes narrow. With a few swift footfalls, he closes in, “You’ve been with the Hwarang for too long. They’ve corrupted you.”
No… It isn’t you who’s changed, it’s your father. 
“Goddamn it! Get off me you bastards!” Despite being out of breath, Jaemin manages to swipe at the Furies with his sword, giving himself space. However, no matter the amount of wounds he’s able to inflict on them, they heal immediately.  
“Father…” 
“If we just sit down and talk this through, I’m sure you’d understand.” Your father’s face lies in a stony demeanor. 
“I–!” Before you can say anything else, he drives his fist into your stomach. Stars leap before your eyes, the world grows dark and you slip into unconsciousness.  
When you awake, you’re in an unfamiliar room. 
“Where…” Your hands gripping your head as you sit up, “Where am I?”
“You’re at the minister’s estate.” A voice says before you and you widen your eyes.
“Taeyong?!” You cry out before noticing the figure next to him. Beside him stands your father. 
“What’s going on here?” You say as you scramble to your feet. “Why are you two together?!”
“I met with Heo secretly here in Ongjin, and we’ve agreed to work together in order to do Fury research.” Taeyong explains, resting his arm on the hilt of his sword. 
“Then… You’re working with Goguryeo? You’ve betrayed Silla… Betrayed the Hwarang…”
“Is that what you think?” Taeyong raises an eyebrow, “Interesting…” Explaining himself had never been one of Taeyong’s strong points.
“How are you feeling, my child?” Heo asks sympathetically, “I apologize for the rough treatment. I hope you aren’t too hurt.” His tone is intimate and caring, you feel yourself wavering towards the father you used to know. 
“I suggest you make no attempts to escape…” Taeyong says calmly but with more intimidation than you’d seen from him before, “We could make that difficult. In any event, it was reckless of you to bring her here, Heo.” He glances at you before continuing, “Kun is no fool. Her disappearance will surely mean that he will be onto our plans. I expect him at any moment.” 
“You told me that if I wanted to know where my daughter was, I just had to follow Na to the Hwarang.”
“Yes. I did.” Taeyong’s lips curve into a frown, “But I never suggested to kidnap her. Alas, what’s done is done. No point arguing about it. We need to be thinking about what this could mean, and plan for it.”
 “I’m sure the Furies I left to deal with Na will return to the estate soon, you needn’t worry about the future.” Heo shrugs.
“What did you do to Jaemin?” Your voice nearly breaks.
“I doubt he survived. After all, I did bring quite a few of them.” 
Your whole body shakes. You want wholeheartedly to not believe it, but the Furies that your father had brought were unlike any you’d ever seen before. Jaemin had already looked pale and weak even before he’d started fighting…
“You just have to assume I’m dead?” A voice says from the open doorway, “C’mon, that hurts my feelings…” He’s leaning against the frame and someone brushes past him, glaring at Taeyong and your father.
“You alright?” Kun asks as he looks at you. 
“I am!” You nod vigorously and he lets out a snort of laughter. 
“How did you find us?!” Heo asks incredulously, “I’ve made so many improvements on my Furies. How could you have destroyed them all?”
“Improvements? If you say so, but if you want to take out the Hwarang, you’ll need about ten times what you sent.” Kun smirks.
“I figured you’d be here soon,” Taeyong murmurs, “You didn’t bring any of the men, though… Well, I suspected you wouldn’t. Still, doesn’t it seem rather reckless for the two of you to charge headfirst into unknown enemy territory?” 
“Explain.” Kun’s eyes narrow at Taeyong, “Why didn’t you contact us?”
“There’s nothing for you in Ongjin.” Taeyong says simply.
“I was given orders by Yeon Gaesomun to come here. They told me to take my Furies and kill the traitors who reside here. However, I found such a plan unagreeable when so many test subjects reside here…” Heo sighs out.  
“We found common ground in our distaste for Goguryeo,” Taeyong explains, “and thusly decided to seize Ongjin for ourselves.”
“So you’re not fighting with our enemy…?” You struggle to piece together everything.
“I’m on your side, child. I have no intention of taking part in mankind’s disputes.” Your father says as he crosses his arms, “Let us bring retribution to the humans who destroyed our clan and the Demons who betrayed us. It is in our destiny to forge a new Demon kingdom with our own hands– no, we will be the only Demon clan!”
You recall Sooyoung explaining how the Heo village had been destroyed by humans. Even then, you can’t get yourself to agree with your father.
Just then, the sound of footsteps loudly resound out from the hallway. Furies pour into the room as Taeyong smiles, “Ah, they seem to have noticed our intruders.”
“Hey–!” Kun’s eyes widen as he notices their faces, “They’re the Hwarang’s–!”
“Not only does this castle hold the remnants of Goguryeo’s Fury army, but also of the Hwarang’s Fury Corps.” Taeyong crosses his arms, “All of the Furies that exist in both Kingdoms are gathered here.” 
Red eyes surround Jaemin, Kun and you. No humanity resides in their gazes. 
“Please give us your help,” Your father calls out to you, “We need you to lead us. You must command the Furies and restore the Heo clan.” 
But you don’t care about restoring the clan. You don’t want to create more Furies so that blood can drive them mad. You don’t want to see more suffering. 
“Father… you’re wrong.” Heo’s eyes go wide when you speak. “Building a kingdom on the corpses of others isn’t right! I can’t agree to it!”
Human or Demon, every life is precious. Just because your home village was destroyed doesn’t mean you can oppress humans. 
“I believe Heo was saying that he’d be willing to assist the Hwarang.” Taeyong interjects, looking at Kun. “What do you think, Qian? Would you like to lead this army of Furies against Goguryeo?” 
“You know the answer.” With Kun having been against Furies from the very beginning, you doubt he’s changed his mind about them.
“So I suppose that ends our negotiation.” Taeyong sighs, slowly drawing his sword from its scabbard. “Very well…”
You stiffen, yet Kun doesn’t move towards his own blade. He remains still, cooly contemplating Taeyong. Almost as if someone’s dumping white ink on it, Taeyong’s hair slowly changes to white and he raises his sword.
Instead of swiping at Kun though, he cuts down a Fury standing nearby him. 
“All a Fury exists for is battle, and now we’ve taken that away from them…” Taeyong shakes his head with a sigh, “The least I can do for them is let them die here, in battle.”
The room falls silent. Then it explodes in noise– the enraged cries of the Furies and the rattle of swords being drawn. 
“Jaemin–” Kun says quickly.
“I know!” The younger shouts and drops into a fighting stance, slipping his hand around the hilt of his sword. A grin splits on his lips as his hair turns white, “Taeyong, this is way too badass for an old guy like you! Why didn’t you tell us?!”
“Well,” Taeyong chuckles, “as they say, to fool your enemies, you must first fool your friends.” Their swords whistle and spark through the air, Fury after Fury falling before them. “Besides, doesn’t the hero’s right-hand man make the best villain?”
Kun responds with a bark of wry laughter and draws his own sword in a flash of silver light as his hair turns white as well. The men get into their stances and face the Furies as Furies themselves.
“The hell are you talking about?” Kun says with a grin, “Still means the hero gets stuck cleaning up the damn mess.” 
As their three swords spin and hiss through the air, blood gushes and spatters, painting the walls of the estate a deep red. Wave after wave conquered, they drown their foes in a sea of blood. You notice that your mouth has gone dry, your hands beginning to shake. In the corner, you spot your father sitting down.
“Everything you told me was a lie?” Heo asks Taeyong. “You said you wanted to do more research on the Furies in the kingdom of Demons… Why?”
“I saw the end.” Taeyong answers, “I was trying to discover a way for Furies to live past their… limits. Our short lifespans made me impatient. To continue my research I even dirtied my hands.” Every suspicious thing he had done had been in the service of a single goal: saving his fellow Furies. “We have no future as Furies. You know this as well as I do, Heo.”
“No matter how resistant you make them to sunlight, they will push themselves too hard, and their lifespans will shrink and the bloodlust will drive them mad.” Taeyong confirms the truth you’d all suspected: there is no way to save the Furies. “We are a mistake: a failed experiment. Furies are not something that should exist in this world. Let’s end this.”
Taeyong’s true intentions leave you surprised, as does his admission that the Furies are a failure. Is he right? Can they not be saved? Has all hope been lost? You let your mind drift for a moment, and then you see a shadow move in the corner of your eye– A Fury only feet from you, his eyes red and mad with bloodlust. You reach for your sword but it’s too late.
Before your hand even touches the hilt, you see the Fury’s blade sweeping toward you. Blood splashes down onto the floor before you, but it isn’t yours. A figure standing before you had taken the blow in your stead.
“Father?!” 
The Fury pulls back for another swing but then it freezes, gurgles oddly and slides neatly in half, a blade glistening in the center.
“Turn your back on us in a fight, will you?” Kun spits as he looks down to the halved Fury, “Idiot.” He shifts his eyes up to your father’s wound, and you see his face twitch. Immediately, he moves closer and turns his back to the two of you, sword held at the ready.
“Are you… alright? Are you hurt anywhere?” Your father asks as he turns to look at you. There’s blood splattered all over his chest. The wound, now that you can see it, is undoubtedly a fatal one. 
“Yes, yes. I’m fine. I’m not hurt at all,” you say quickly. His hand reaches out and grasps your shoulder, he falls to his knees and you follow after him. Quickly you lay him on his back, clutching at his hand. 
“Our research was a… failure. I knew there was no future for the Furies…” He murmurs out as tears begin to well in your eyes, “But I couldn’t give it up… I wanted to bring back your clan, your family.” Ever since you were young he’d always tried to do what was best for you. “It seems my fate is to die with the Furies… I have committed terrible sins. This is for the best, please, don’t cry.” 
You nod your head knowing that if you’re to open your mouth the tears would never stop. He gives you one last smile, sighs a calm breath and is gone.
After what seems like an eternity, you look up. The battle is over. The Furies that came to fruition by the Hwarang and your father lie dead, scattered around the room. 
“Kind of a waste, isn’t it?” Taeyong says as he looks at the bodies, “That many Furies could have been awfully useful… The Hwarang could have used these men.”
“You don’t win battles by thinking you’ll lose them.” Kun says.
“Well, you don’t win by thinking you’ll win either,” Jaemin snorts with laughter, then coughs to cover it up.
It’s true, the Hwarang had lost a lot of Furies but their unity had grown stronger.
“Ack–!” A sudden burst of pain wipes the grin from Jaemin’s face. Taeyong, too, has doubled over in agony. Their hair which had returned to normal goes back to stark white. 
“Looks like we’ve reached our limit,” Taeyong says through grit teeth.
Dejun’s words suddenly flash to you. The Fury’s power isn’t a gift from the gods. You’re only borrowing life that you would spend decades on. 
Jaemin sees your eyes go wide and gives you an awkward sort of laugh, “We were some of the first Furies.” They’d been in more battles as Furies than anyone else, and all of the strength and healing they’d enjoyed ate away at their futures until there was nothing left. 
“Did you know…?” The question leaves Kun as a whisper. 
Taeyong smiles and then gives a slow nod, “What warrior doesn’t know his own body?” His legs suddenly shake violently and he falls to the floor, Jaemin soon following. 
Kun drops to his knees and takes both of their hands in his own.
“Kun… Do you remember?” Taeyong remineces weakly, “Back when we were at Moon Hall, we would spend all night talking.”
“Yeah,” Kun nods, “We would say that Taeil would never be content with being just the heir of a small school. We promised to do what we could for him…”
“Who would’ve thought he would leave this world before us?” Taeyong frowns and his voice grows quiet, “I know we haven’t always seen eye to eye, but without you, we couldn’t have built up the Hwarang.”
“Same goes for you too…” Kun says with a small smile, “You were the one that always calmed me down whenever I’d start a fight with Yixing.” He’s doing his best to act tough so that Jaemin and Taeyong won’t worry. 
“Looks like we’re taking the lead this time… Don’t be in too much of a hurry to catch up though, alright?” Jaemin adds in a bright and kind tone, “I mean, you barely had any time to rest since you joined the Hwarang.”
Kun just nods.
“I’m having a hard time buying that ‘yes’. You’re a little too short-tempered to keep a promise like that…”
“Shut it, you little brat. You really think I’m gonna take that crap from you?”
Jaemin’s face relaxes as Kun snarls back at him. Even in this moment, Jamein’s tender and kind for the benefit of his Chief. 
“You must go south.” Taeyong suddenly says. “Heo said he used water from Tamna when he was refining the pimul.”
Your eyes widen– perhaps there still is hope. Maybe, just maybe, there’s a chance something south can repair the curse of the Fury to these men. Taeyong’s last words are the fait muster of hope for the fate of the Furies. 
“Kun… Don’t… don’t lose sight of what matters, alright? Being reckless doesn’t work out so well.” Jaemin’s voice has grown rough and raspy. Kun’s knuckles whiten as they tighten around his comerade’s hands. But with a sound like sand pouring over a stone, their hands crumble into ash. In moments, they are no more. 
“Kun…” You call out but he doesn’t answer. He only stares, silent, at the twin piles of ash that sit where his friends were only moments before. There aren’t any tears in his eyes, but even so he’s somehow crying. 
You’re not sure how long you sit there before he stands up. The room that includes only you two is devastatingly quiet.
“Let’s go.” He says quietly, his voice curt and clipped. Yet, when he turns to you, his eyes suddenly go wide. “Hey, no crying.”
You nod, trying to stop, but it’s no good. The tears don’t pause, regardless of how much you wipe them away. In one day– an hour– you’ve been forced to say goodbye to Jaemin, to Taeyong… and the father you haven’t seen in over a year.
December 17th, 666 – Ongjin, Kingdom of Silla The events of the magistrate’s house resonate with you for a while, and after some time has passed you find yourself alone again, standing in front of the estate. Wisps of snowflakes fall around you, wind hitting your cheeks and chapping your lips.
“They sure took their sweet-ass time,” Kun quips as he exits the front gates of the building. His worn expression indicates a worried tiredness. 
“Hello,” you greet him, “How was the meeting?”
“How? Hmph.” He shakes his head, “Those idiots north of Pyongyang don’t like any of the plans we’ve proposed, even with Junhui and I poking around as often as we are. Apparently with the incident here and continuing at Tagok, Munmu doesn’t trust us yet to act. That’s the bullshit they relayed! Can you believe that?”
Kun paces the front gate, arms crossed and breath puffing in the air, “They act all high and mighty on their capital in the north, but pussy out when it’s time for the final push. It’s pathetic, Munmu hasn’t done shit and is relying on the Tang for everything.” He frowns, “Whatever. Let’s head back to the inn, the sun’s really beating down today.”
“Okay…” A cloud of frustration seems to follow you as you return to the inn, most notably in Kun. “We’ll be there soon enough, hang in there.” His skin looks pale and watching him in silent agony makes your heart ache.
“Don’t worry about me,” he sighs, “How about you? Are you holding up alright?”
“I’m… fine. I mean, I’m pretty resilient.”
“How can you say that?” He lets out a dry laugh, “You stay up all night just to tend to me…”
“I’m tough.” You smile back, “When you finally fall asleep, it gives me the peace of mind so that I can rest easily too.” 
Kun’s lips curl and he doesn’t seem satisfied with your answer. Instead, he just stares at you. He turns his head gradually to the hues of red and orange covering the winter sky in the distance. You follow his lead and look towards the horizon. 
“Huh…?” Your vision suddenly blurs. 
“Hey, what’s the matter?” Kun’s right next to you, but yet his voice sounds so distant. 
Before you know it, your body collapses to the ground. 
“Hey!” Kun shouts out, “You alright?! Hang in there!”
When you regain consciousness, you discover yourself tucked snugly in bed. 
“About time you woke up,” Kun says as you look around the room. “Do you know where you are right now?”
“Ah! Kun…” Once you  realize that it’s him, you snap out of your daze. “I’m sorry, I–” 
“You idiot!” He shouts, causing you to jump. “If you weren’t feeling well, you shouldn’t have gone outside. You should’ve rested!”
“I’m sorry…” It feels as if a stone has dropped into the pit of your stomach as he scolds you, and you can only look down at your hands. 
“Uhm, well… I guess I shouldn’t be too hard on you,” Kun sighs. “You’ve barely had any chance to rest, especially after what happened with your father’s passing… I can’t really be surprised that you would push yourself to act like everything’s normal.”
But he’s lost people too, and if you’re suppressing how you’ve been feeling you can’t imagine the turmoil happening within him,
“Until further notice, you don’t have to join me when I meet with members of the war council. You’re going to stay here to rest.”
“What?” You shake your head, “No, I’m fine. Today was just a lot to handle. So, please… I’ll be careful. I won’t let this become a problem again in the future.”
“Why? Because Taeil, Minhyung and Jisung asked you to watch after me or something?” His head tilts, “None of the men who died for us would have wanted you to look after me at the expense of your own health.”
He does have a point. But that isn’t the only reason you’re still here.
“I… I want to be by your side, Kun.”
“Yeah?” His brow furrows, “Why’s that?”
“What do you mean ‘why’?” I, um…” You can’t continue. Of course, you know the true answer but to admit that is a bit too much. There’s no way you can tell him your feelings. Suddenly, the hairs on the back of your neck stand on end.
“Well, fine. Whatever,” he waves it off, flashing his usual sense of detachment, muttering to himself,  “If you don’t want to tell me, I don’t care.” Caught up in his own thoughts, he mutters something shortly, “You were close with Namekawa, right?”
“I wasn’t close with him… My father was, though.” You admit, “However, he did watch after me frequently.” 
“I see. He’s a good man, but I just can’t seem to put my full trust in him.” 
“Okay…?” You can’t quite grasp the point Kun is trying to make. 
“If anything happens while we’re out here, I want you to find him and stay with him.” Kun states, “Even if Goguryeo catches you, they won’t touch you as long as you’re with him.”
“What? Why would they–”
“Look. When you’re at war, you can’t just prepare for victory. Gotta consider your defeat as well.” Kun crosses his arms, “I’m sure Doctor Namekawa will show up here any day, so when that happens…” He falls silent. After a while, he shakes his head tenderly, “Nothing. Forget it. I’m just rambling.”
In the empty space of your conversation, you try to sift through what Kun’s trying to say. All you can do is pray that this brief, peaceful reprieve will prolong itself for a bit longer. 
December 21th, 666 – Ongjin, Kingdom of Silla In the following days Minghao and Kun make another trip to the war council stationed in the minister’s home. Although they hope their audience with the officials will be fruitful, it turns out to be less than eventful. 
“Yeah,” Minghao sighs, “It’s no use. The water’s going to be frozen over soon enough, I get that. But waiting until it thaws in the spring…” 
“It’s idiotic,” Kun agrees. “Guess we should kick back and relax until then, huh?”
“Even if you’re joking it’s not funny.” Minghao frowns, “We’re only giving them more time to reinforce Pyongyang.”
“Sure,” Kun says, “But it’s not like they’ve got anyone else to come in and save them. They’ll be holed up in the city, waiting for a reprieve. If they’re smart they’d have surrendered by now.”
“Knowing Gaesomun, it’s not like he’ll have a shortage of ideas of how to turn this around. For fuck’s sake he killed their last king to wrest power from him. I suppose we’ll refrain from making any rash decisions until we reunite with Li.”
December 26th, 666 – Ongjin, Kingdom of Silla You find Kun in his apartments when you approach him, “I hear our forces are gathering in the north of the city… Are we leaving?”
“The Hwarang serves two things:” he sighs, “the King and the Kingdom. That hasn’t changed.”
“The Hwarang shows the way, right?” You point out.
“It’s funny, isn’t it? All this time, we had those lords and ministers looking down and judging our actions. Now look at us.” You can almost recall Taeil’s grin as Kun smiles. 
“Well, that’s one more reason not to die, then.” 
It’s a burden on him, undoubtedly, but Kun has seen many of his friends lay down their lives for the Hwarang and what it represents. Knowing what it had meant to them, he can’t allow himself to die.
“As long as the men believe in what we stand for, I can’t let the Hwarang die.” The doubt you’d seen in him weeks before is gone. He’s accepted his place at the head of the Hwarang. “I have to protect them.”
He looks over to you, his gaze warm, it makes you feel better than you have in a while. Just being next to him is enough to make you feel like everything is right in the world. 
December 30th, 666 – Ongjin, Kingdom of Silla A few more days pass and the men you’d left to go to Tagok Pass finally reach Onjin. Unfortunately, bad news comes with their victory over the pass.
“Yuta has fallen in battle,” Shotaro reports, his head bowed, “His last words were ‘Leave the rest to Kun’...” 
Ever since this war started, you’re unsure of how many times you’ve seen this expression on a warrior’s face. You bite your lip until it almost bleeds.
Kun puts his hands on Shotaro’s shoulders, giving him some words of encouragement, “I’m sorry I put you through that, Osaki. I’m just glad you made it back alive.”
Shotaro’s eyes grow wide and he looks overcome with emotion, “Th–Thank you sir!”
Jaemin and Taeyong lost their lives in Ongjin, and Yuta at Tagok… This means that Kun is the only Fury left among the Hwarang.
“It’s been hard already, but I’m pretty sure things are going to get worse,” Kun crosses his arms, “You’ve all fought enough, so…” 
Shotaro sets his jaw and looks back at Kun, “I’ve given my life to the Hwarang, it just hasn’t been lost yet. We’ll follow you to the end of the world and back, sir.”
“Me too!” Jeno says firmly, “I’ll follow you all the way!”
“Let me accompany you, no matter where it takes us!” Sungchan adds.
“You guys…”  Kun’s almost at a loss for words.
“We want to fight as the Hwarang, not as foot soldiers of Silla. We want to fight for the justice we believe in.” Shotaro smiles at him reassuringly. 
You’re sure that if Taeil were alive, he’d be crying. The Hwarang united in body and mind. A great happiness wells within you and suddenly you can’t hold it in any longer. Tears spill forth from your eyes.
“... Idiots.” Kun’s face twists into a sneer, but there isn’t any hiding the warmth in his eyes as he looks out over the men. They know the coming battle will not be an easy one, but there is no doubt in their mind: their place is with Kun and the Hwarang. 
January 7th, 667 – Ongjin, Kingdom of Silla Ultimately, it is decided that Minghao’s fleet will head to Cholsan while Li’s army will march to Yangdeok. In the cold of winter, you leave Ongjin and head into the surrounding forest. 
You’re only a few minutes walk in when Kun stops you, “I can’t take you this time. You stay here.”
“What?” You stop in your tracks, “But why? Where is this coming from?”
“There’s going to be a lot of fighting. You should get away from that. No reason for you to stick with us anymore, right? I know Taeil, Jisung and Minhyung asked you to take care of me. But I’m sure you’ve fulfilled your promise in full. If you were to die in the mess of this war, then I’ll be the one that gets scolded by them in the afterlife.” His voice quiets, “I think it’s time you are released from us.”
“No!” Now that your father’s passed, there isn’t anything to justify staying with the Hwarang but… Your heart yearns to be with Kun.  
“Donghyuck’ll probably be coming after me soon, but I can take him. You don’t need to worry about that.” 
“That’s not it!” Once again you find yourself almost yelling. “I don’t want to stay just because I think I need to be protected from him!”
He sighs, looking as if he’s dealing with a fussy toddler. “Come on, don’t be like that… I can’t make you happy.” 
Your eyes go wide, your voice shaking when you speak, “... I don’t need to be happy. All I want to do is fight alongside the Hwarang. I want to follow the same path you do.” There was never an ulterior motive for staying alongside him. “Please, I’ll do whatever you tell me to.”
“Well, I’m touched that you feel that way, but I want you to be happy. Without being with us.” He isn’t saying this to just make you feel better. You feel the sincerity behind his words. And you’re happy to know he cares, but it pains you just as much. 
“These are orders from the Hwarang’s Chief.” He looks you in the eye, his voice flat and cold. “You would impede the function of the Hwarang, and therefore will not accompany us to Pyongyang.
The air is sucked from your lungs and your heart skips a beat. You feel the blood drain from your face and your hands begin to tremble. 
“You’re a woman, and you deserve to have your own life. I can’t let us tie you down anymore.” 
Hearing that, all of the power in your body leaves you, and you fall to your knees in the snow underfoot, “Kun… Please wait…” You want so badly to scream this at him, but your voice no longer feels like your own.
“Take care. That is all.” The minute he turns his back on you, you know it isn’t good. It’s clear that he really intends to leave you behind and you can’t even lift a finger to stop him. 
He’s getting further and further away, his footsteps crunching in the snow. It was him who you’d been running after since the battle in Seorabeol… A man that, up to now, was working on chipping the distance between you, bit by bit. 
“I don’t want this!” You scream out, forcing your voice to be heard. But Kun walks as if he doesn’t hear you. “Qian Kun!” Even calling out his name doesn't make him stop. And eventually, you can’t see his back anymore.  
Minutes pass and you remain in a defeated stupor on the ground. It feels as if something inside of you has crumbled. You’ve been chasing after Kun this whole time… but he’s someone who only moves forward. His whole life was lived by keeping his pain sealed away, but never once did he leave you behind. He would always give you the chance to cling onto him.
Now you understand that there aren’t any more chances to gather yourself, or run after him, or any other childish endeavor to bring you closer. He has deemed no further use of you and severed the ties that burden his duty. 
“Ah… Excuse me…” A quiet voice speaks up behind you, and you turn to see who it is. “I’m sorry but I heard everything,” Wen Junhui inches toward you,  “I apologize for eavesdropping, but there didn’t seem to be a good moment for me to admit I was here.” He coughs awkwardly and hands you a small piece of cloth to wipe your face. 
He waits for you to calm down before he begins to speak again, “You want to stay with him, I take it? Then… Will you wait for us? We’re settling down in Yangdeok before our attack on Pyongyang… So, can you wait until then?”
“What do you mean…?” 
“Once we’ve settled in, I can send for you. I mean, I can hardly leave you crying here alone!”
“General Wen…” Your mouth hangs open.
“Oh, you don’t need to thank me. Once you get to Yangdeok, I’ll assign you to Qian. It won’t be easy work, but at least you’ll be with him.”
February 14, 667 – Yangdeok, Kingdom of Silla You get your summons right after Yangdeok falls to Junhui’s forces. Yangdeok, to the Silla and Tang armies, has been seen as Goguryeo’s last city to topple before moving forth to Pyongyang to its west. 
“It’s good to see you again!” Junhui calls out to you, waving his arms in the air to summon you closer. 
“Thank you so much for arranging all of this,” You say as you gather your bags together and walk over to him, “And congratulations on your victory here.”
“My victory is a bit of an exaggeration,” he says, “Qian put in a lot of work too. As soon as we finished deciding on the new council, I sent for you.”
“The new council?” 
“Yeah,” he nods enthusiastically, “With the effort going to close in soon, we decided to pull our forces together and combine the northern armies and southern armies to collapse on Pyongyang. Xu Minghao is our general now, he knows enough about the Silla and Tang armies to combine us together.”
You learn that Junhui has been elected the Army Minister, and Kun has been named the Assistant Army Minister. 
“You had to wait a while, I understand.” Junhui frowns apologetically, “Was it too long?”
“It could have been shorter,” You say halfway joking and halfway serious. 
Still, the fact that they’re this close to pushing inward says something to the end of this war. Despite the losses you’ve accrued, this is a glimmer of hope. 
“Ever since we got to Yangdeok, Kun’s been… different.” Junhui notes your confused expression and continues, “He’s nicer to the men, which is good, but he spends too much time locked away in his room. Says he spends most of his time in deep thought and won’t let anyone come by.” He sighs, shaking his head, probably wondering what to do with the man before reaching into his pack and removing a piece of parchment. “I think he needs you,” a smile graces his lips and he hands the paper to you.
“Me?” You question, taking it from him.
“This document officially appoints you to your position. You can get the details after you give it to Kun.” 
It takes a while, but you muster up the courage to go into the main hall of where the leaders of the army are staying. Yet, Kun isn’t among them, he’s in his room, alone. After inquiring about where his room is, you find yourself standing before it.
You take in a deep breath and rap your hand against the door several times. After a few silent seconds, a tired voice drifts out, “I’m not attending… This isn’t the time for a party.”
Without saying anything you push open the door. Kun turns toward the door, preparing a half-hearted tirade for whoever had decided to intrude on his solitude. When he sees you, the words freeze in his throat.
“Reporting as ordered, sir.” You say, standing straight, “I have been assigned to serve as Assistant Army Minister Qian Kun’s page… by Army Minister Wen Junhui.”  
His mouth works soundlessly for a moment, finally closing with a snap. He stares at you incredulously for several more seconds before frowning, “It’s a mistake. I haven’t been told about this.”
You pull out the letter that Junhui had given you and hand it to him, “I received these orders from him earlier.”
Kun’s hand snatches the letter and he scans the page rapidly, his frown deepening with each line. When he finishes he shoots you a sharp look and thrusts the letter back into your empty hands, “No. Take it back. I don’t approve of these orders.”  
“I understand…” You sigh out, looking at the paper now in your grasp before tearing it into pieces. 
“What are you doing?” His eyes widen in shock.
“I don’t care if you won’t approve these orders,” you let the pieces fall to the ground, “I shouldn’t have relied on them in the first place.” You hadn’t taken the letter because you wanted to be in Yangdeok, you accepted Junhui’s help and came here because you want to be with Kun. That’s all that matters. “I came here because I wanted to. I want you to let me stay. Here. With you.” 
It’s his choice.
“Not fair for me to be the only guy with the luxury of a girl for a page. Especially when I’m sending men off to die.”
“Is… Is that why you left me?”
Kun falls silent and shifts uncomfortably. 
“Stop this!” You find yourself yelling, and Kun looks equally surprised. “You always do this! You decide you can’t do something, then you make up all the excuses you need to justify it! You say you’re doing it for my feelings without even knowing my feelings!”
When he’d left you behind, he said that he couldn’t make you happy– that you should go on and live your life. But he is what makes you happy, and you want to live your life with him. Now he’s trying to push you away again so that he can bear this burden alone. You can’t let him do that.
“You take on so much and you won’t let anyone help!” Tears sting at the corners of your eyes as you try and make him see the errors of his ways. 
He crosses his arms, “That’s my job. If I can handle it, then it’s my responsibility to!”
“What about the people who have to watch you do this?!” You’d watched him torture himself this way for far too long… Every hardship, every burden, is his and his alone to suffer with. And you haven’t been the only one to witness this. “I can’t let you do this to yourself! I want to be here for you! I want to help you! What else am I supposed to do?!”
With a sigh he falls silent, “I give up.”
You blink, furrowing your brow as you have no idea what he’s referring to. 
“Can’t fight a country girl… Better to just listen to them, I guess.” His voice is gentle as he looks up with a wry smile. You then find his arms wrapped around you. As unexpected as it is, you let yourself sink into his embrace. He holds you tightly, almost as if now that he finally has you, he doesn’t want to ever let you go.
“Ever since you left…” He murmurs before pausing, and you can sense him trying to organize his feelings. “I’ve figured some things out,” he squeezes you a bit tighter, “you… supported me. Guess that’s the best way to put it.” As he speaks, he sounds slightly bewildered, as if he can’t believe what he’s saying. “When you’re not here… It’s hard for me to deal with it. All of it. Life, I guess.” With each word, your heart swells warmly in your chest. Each word descends like the snowflakes outside, gently gathering in your heart. 
“You saved me,” he whispers and you feel the warmth of his body touching every part of yours. You’re sure there’s tear stains on his uniform from where you’ve been pressing your face into his robes. “... Do you think the Hwarang still stands for what it means to be a true warrior? Have I done what I was supposed to? Have I led us down the right path?”
You nod, “The soul of the Hwarang that our friends believed in is alive in you. In fact, I think it’s stronger now… We’ve been through a lot but it’s brought all of us together.” 
His lips curl into a smile, “Hearing you say that makes me happy. The men that the Hwarang have left are true warriors. No more need for the iron fist.”
Everyone in the Hwarang now has the unity of vision that brings the clarity of purpose, hopefully meaning Kun’s burden will lessen a little.
“Well,” you say, “from now on, please don’t try and hide your problems from me. I’m here to help you. You don’t have to do this alone anymore.” 
He’s silent now, but his arms stay wrapped around you. You feel his hands grasp at your robes as his voice is barely above a whisper, “Stay with me…”
February 15, 667 – Yangdeok, Kingdom of Silla The next morning, you’re greeted by familiar faces waiting for you in the main hall.
“Long time no see!” Jeno smiles, “We were eagerly awaiting your return for a while now.”
“Jeno, Sungchan…” You smile back at the two. 
“How was the dramatic reunion?” Sungchan pushes eagerly.
“What do you mean?” Your eyes widen, unable to answer him with a straight face as his face blushes with color. 
“Well, ever since Commander– er Chief– left your side, it looked like he just sank deeper and deeper into depression,” he says quickly, “It just made us realize how much he needs you by his side.”
“And now the two of you can be together as much as you want to be!” Jeno adds.
“Ah,” you feel heat rise to your cheeks, “Yes, well, I’m sure we can.”
“Oh?” You hear footsteps coming from down the hall, “I thought I heard a familiar voice. So, you’re in Yangdeok too…” 
“Jungwoo!” Your eyes widen at the familiar face, “You’re safe!”
“Indeed,” he smiles weakly, “Sadly, I was injured in combat against some of the Goguryeo forces.” 
“He was appointed as the Infantry Head of the Kyongjong Unit during the last meeting,” Sungchan says quickly. 
“Really? That’s fantastic news! Congratulations, Jungwoo.” 
“Thank you, but I don’t know how much I’ll be able to accomplish in this state, unfortunately.” You glance down to his bandaged left arm before looking back up to his face. “But for now, I am here, and all I can do is fight until the end beside Kun.”
“Jungwoo…” 
“If there’s ever anything you need from me, don’t hesitate to ask. I will always support you and Kun.”
“Of course,” you smile at him, “Thank you.”
February 25th, 667 – Yangdeok, Kingdom of Silla As Kun’s page, you spend every day assisting him in his duties. Since your arrival in Yangdeok, he’s seemed much more at ease during the daylight hours. Your job sees you spending more time around him than you ever had before. He’s actually begun treating you quite nicely. 
You feel a little bad that you’re getting spoiled, but whenever you’re around him, your heart pounds.
On one afternoon, some days after you’ve settled in to Yangdeok, Junhui comse to visit Kun in his quarters.
“I’ve made tea,” you say as you set down the tray in front of the two sitting figures. 
“Thank you,” Junhui smiles, gingerly picking up one of the cups before him and looking over to Kun, “Your assistant here is quite something. Tell me, where did you find her?”
“Well,” Kun leans back in his seat, “I think some big shot wannabe had her sent over here without my permission. You know anything about that?”
“Oh, I was doing it for your sake, you know. Although, I’m a bit jealous now” he sighs, “A cute, dedicated, efficient page… What man could ask anything more?”
“No, I’m… um….” You say quickly, frantically busying yourself with your tea. 
Kun glances at you for a moment, then back at Junhui, his face calm and serene, “I agree… So long as she sticks with me, I don’t think I’ll ever need any other page.”
You nearly drop your tea at his statement. Junhui also looks surprised, but raises his cup to his lips to hide it. 
You look for words to say but you can only hear the blood rushing to your head and feel your heart pounding in your chest.
“I, ah, didn’t think I’d hear something like that from you, Qian…” Junhui muses, “I’d want a wife like her too.”
“Well she’s mine.” Kun says simply, “You’ll have to find one of your own because there’s no way I’m letting her go.”
Junhui laughs, “Now you’re just rubbing it in.” You feel your face growing hotter by the second.”Well, with Kun in this sort of mood, I suppose I shouldn’t stay too long, hm?” With one last grin to you, he turns to Kun. “So, back to business… Do you think they’ll be mobilizing?”
“Yeah,” Kun nods, “As soon as the snow melts.”
“Well, if you think so too, then we should prepare to mobilize.” Junhui sighs, “Minghao says it will be a few more weeks before his ships can set out from Ongjin.” 
“There’ll be a fight once they reach Pyongyang’s harbor, that’s for sure,” Kun nods, “There’s no way they’d let us take that easily.” 
“Of course,” Junhui agrees, “We’ll need to reconvene to see what troops we can send to aid the navy.”
“Huh,” Kun muses, “Gotta admit, before we came here, I never thought you and I would see eye to eye.”
“I know, right?” The other smiles, “I was taken aback by you the first time we met.”
“And I was with you.” 
Junhui laughs, “Well, I wasn’t born into a family of warriors…”
“Hey, me neither. My family were merchants from Tang before I was adopted.”
“Yet here we are, commanding respect as true warriors…” Junhui nearly marvels at the fact, “A man can only be judged by the path he walks, not the name he bears, nor the house from which he comes. We chose to fight for what we believe in. That path led us here. That’s all there is to it.”
Kun and Junhui are two very different people, but listening to his passion as he talks resonates with you as well. You were born into a family of Demons, but here you are. All your life, you thought you were human. Nothing more, nothing less. But the truth in this discovery gave you life beyond you thought you were, and they accepted you.
“Our ambition will never waver. We’ll fight to the end like we promised to.”
“Thank you for your time,” Junhui says, setting his cup down. He nods to you and Kun before standing and excusing himself from the room. 
“They’re already going to fight?” You ask as you begin to clear the teacups.
“Come here,” Kun says, reaching out and taking your hand in his. He stands, gently pulling you towards the door outside. The wind is frigid, without your thick coat on it cuts you straight to the bone. “See that plain down there?” From the higher vantage you have, you see the rolling hills pour down into a sunken valley that spans as far as the eye can see.
“We’ll go down the plain and attack Pyongyang from there. Minghao’s ships will come from the west and attack by sea. And if all is communicated correctly, the forces up north will converge on the city at the same time as us.”
“Then we’ve got to make sure we plan all of that out correctly, right?” You ask, “Sending troops in waves would only give them time to prepare for the next one.”
“Yeah,” Kun smiles, “If we can take Ajinham before they can fortify it well enough I’m hopeful we can end this before summer hits. The battle in Pyongyang will be my last. It will be the last place I draw my sword as a warrior.”
“Kun…” You’re desperate to talk about anything else. 
No sooner do you step back into the inviting warmth of his apartments does his expression suddenly shift. He lets out a grunt as you watch his Fury nature forcing itself to the fore. His hair shifts hue, his eyes turn red.
“Don’t worry,” he assures you weakly, “I’ve been doing pretty well since I got here. Looks like my body’s getting worse. Hope it’ll hold up until spring ends.” Does he mean that he’s ready to throw away his life so long as he lives to fight in one last battle?
“Please don’t say that,” you say, “Didn’t I tell you why I’m here?” Unfastening your collar, exposing the flesh of your neck, you step towards him, “Please don’t say you just want to live until spring. I need you to live longer than that. Much longer.”
“You’re a scary woman, you know that?” He smiles, although the pain twists it into a heart-wrenching grimace. His hands clasp your shoulders, and you feel his lips brush against your neck. “I haven’t tasted blood in a while,” Kun murmurs.
“You haven’t had any since you left?” His silence answers your question, “Why?”
You feel as if you know the answer, though. If he only cares about his body lasting until spring, then he likely hasn’t been taking care of it. 
“I suppose my blood must taste awfully good,” you chuckle, “Because, you know, I’m a Demon. In fact, it must be so good that you don’t want to drink anyone else’s blood.”
He lets out a snort of surprise, “Well maybe you’re right…”
March 2nd, 667 – Yangdeok, Kingdom of Silla You find Kun at his desk, his eyes fixed on a stack of documents, and you muster a troubled smile at him. This has been a familiar scene for whenever you find him, as it seems his work ethic is the same as it ever had been.
Even if you are worried that he’ll start to find you obnoxious, you place his teacup beside him as he writes furiously onto a piece of parchment.  
“The hell’s this?” He asks, not looking up from his work, “Don’t remember asking you for tea.” Kun scrunches his nose as he finally looks up to you as you flash him a bright grin. A sigh escapes him, “Don’t worry. I’m not tired. In fact, I’m starting to think I’m cut out for all this bureaucratic crap.”
“Well, it’s true that your duties here in your office are very important, but…” You hum, “It’s not like I can imagine a job or position that you wouldn’t be cut out for.”
“Of course you can. I hate public speaking, and even worse, I hate having to deal with emotional bullshit.” You suppose for him, a loathing profession never had gotten in the way of completing his duties. You’re certain that he has a knack for public speaking, let alone balancing the emotional stress that comes with managing a large group of soldiers. “So, it looks like I have to thank Minghao and Junhui for stomaching all of that shit so that I don’t have to.”
You chuckle at him, “Yes, but in return, you’re the one who’s in charge of managing all of the subordinates. Right?”
“Eh, win some, lose some. They’ve been calling me a Demon for so long, it’s kinda been throwing me off.” He shakes his head, “Hell, I don’t think you could pay me enough to bark at those idiots, or act like the Demon I used to.” His warm eyes glance toward you with an exceptional gleam, and it’s like he’s a completely different person from the man you met all those years ago in Seorabeol.
It’s true– Kun is no longer the Demon Commander and it seems like he’s discovered an inimitable truth: the practice of self-love is deeply fulfilling. 
“What’s the matter?” His gaze narrows, “Do I have something on my face?”
“I was wondering when people started calling you a Demon.”
“I guess it’ll come up sooner or later… Don’t get too excited, it's not that interesting…”
March 19th, 667 – Yangdeok, Kingdom of Silla Before Minghao’s fleet is launched from Ongjin, a group is splintered off from the main army in Yangdeok and sent to the navy to aid in their future attack on Pyongyang. Jeong Sungchan had volunteered to go and you received word on the thirteenth that the fleet had left port to set the offensive in motion. 
On the night of the news’ arrival, Kun holds a meeting into the late, late hours of the night.
“Our meeting is over,” Shotaro says as he exits the meeting hall, looking to where you’ve been sitting patiently. 
“Thank you for telling me, Shotaro,” you smile up at him. “I’m planning on bringing Kun something to eat, would you like anything?”
“Oh no, I’m quite alright.” He says glancing back to the room, “Although I think it best for you to hold off on your plans for now. I don’t want to worry you but Kun’s been in quite the foul mood after tonight’s meeting.”
For Shotaro to be in such a dour mood must mean that whatever they'd discussed in there must have been truly serious.  
“It can’t be that bad, I’m used to being scolded…” You raise your head high and stand before his door. As you let yourself into his room, you see something that stops you dead in your tracks. Kun isn’t sitting in his usual spot. Instead, he’s sitting on the floor with an apprehensive expression. “I=I’m sorry. I, um, heard your meeting ended. If you’d like something to eat I can bring something up soon. What do you say?”
“Don’t want it. Not hungry.” He’s curt, and you can tell he’s irritable.
Although whatever was discussed in their meeting had been left in the meeting room, you can tell those heavy thoughts still swirl around his mind.
“Is there anything I can do for you?” You ask him.
“I don’t know how many times I’ve heard you say that,” he sighs, “I seriously have nothing to ask of you. Sorry for taking things out on you.” Now he turns his head upward to look at you with a sad smile, “When we first men, it drove me mad thinking that you and I couldn’t relate to anything at all. But now that you’re here, I can truly say that it makes me happy to have you here with me. I mean it.”
“Kun…?” 
“You’ve kept your eyes on me this whole time… Ever since we were in Seorabeol, in fact. If I think about it, you’re probably the person who’s seen me at my lowest.” He lets out a dry laugh, “It’s ironic, isn’t it? Thanks to you, I can remember. The weight of my burden… The reason every one of our friends sacrificed themselves. If it’s something as simple as rushing straight in, I can just handle that kind of stuff myself. But having you here with me as someone to talk me through doing something stupid make me think twice. You’re my rock.”
He moves to his feet, walking over to the window cracked open to let cool air into the room, “Putting my life on the line isn’t something I have to think about, but it’s all about knowing the timing. You’ve helped me to come to this conclusion.”
“Then if my life’s purpose is to be there for you, then nothing could make me happier.”
Another laugh, “I’ve only caused you trouble. It’s too much of a burden to put on the shoulders of a woman like you.”
“I won’t let this bring me down… I’m your rock after all.”
“I see…” He hums, leaving the windowsill and slowly begins walking toward you. “I’ve changed my mind. I could use something to eat. Preferably your cooking.”
“Oh? Is there something in particular you’d like?”
“Surprise me,” he smiles, “Just make sure it’s good. Cook like the fate of the Hwarang is in your hands.” It’s as if the realization of your connection hits you suddenly, and you can’t help but grin madly.
With the threat of war looming on the horizon, you can sense that Kun’s mind will struggle to find itself at ease in the coming days. You take solace in knowing that you can give him just one moment of reprieve before whatever’s to come.
March 15th, 667 – Yangdeok, Kingdom of Silla Several days later, the town begins to welcome springtime. As you all had long anticipated, Minghao’s ships make port in Cholsan but stay docked until given the word to advance on their enemy. Being a key member of these discussions of when to push forward, Kun is often pulled away from the Hwarang’s compound and Yangdeok in general, to a secret meeting place where it is believed all high ranking members of the Silla and Tang debate. You, on the other hand, have been ordered to remain in Yangdeok, the only thing you can do is wait patiently for his safe return.
The day that the men stoll back through the door is a happy one; Kun, Jeno and Shotaro stepping inside from the warmer day. 
“I’m so glad to see you all safe…” You aren’t sure what catches hold of you, but as soon as you catch site of them, you feel your heart begin to swell and tears begin to prick at your eyes. 
“Such a crybaby,” Kun chuckles, “You know, pretty soon you’re going to dry up from all the tears you’re losing.” Despite his words, he stands next to you with a warm greeting.
“Have you heard from Sungchan?” You look at Jeno, “I know the ships arrived in Cholsan a few days ago…” 
 Suddenly, everyone’s expressions drop.
Jeno furiously bites his lip, “We received word that the troop of men he went with to Cholsan were ambushed somewhere along their route… There haven’t been any reports of survivors.” 
An altogether completely different emotion washes over you, the tears justifying themselves. This has been the first time since arriving in Yangdeok that you have to surrender yourselves to the news of another lost comrade, and your vision blurs for a moment.
“Sungchan had been dealing with the guilt of being unable to protect Taeil for quite some time… If I recall,” Shotaro closes his eyes, “it was his wish to greet the Chief with his head held proudly when he crossed over into the afterlife. Sungchan didn’t die a coward, so I believe that at the very least he accomplished that.”
Later that afternoon, as the sun begins to transition into red and orange hues, Kun summons you to his quarters. The light filters in on him as he sits at his desk, looking up at you as you enter.
“You’ve got time,” He says quietly, “Get as far away from here as you can. I can send you with a merchant’s caravan, I’ll get everything worked out. You don’t need to woot about a thing.”
You understand immediately what he’s trying to do. Kun knows the loss of war- does he not want you to get mixed into the crossfire?
“You can try and convince me all you want but I won’t budge… I want to stay. With you,” you say softly. Knowing everything he’s gone through, why would you leave him now? Besides, you’re sure if you hear of his passing in some far off, distant place, it would surely break you in two.
He lets out a breathy laugh that almost sounds more like a sigh of relief, “I figured you’d say that. You’re a real strange one.” You watch his eyes flick in miniscule directions as if he’s coming up with another plan.
“You’re worried about me, right?”
“Of course.” He says immediately.
“Well if you’re worried about me, then don’t let me out of your sight, okay? It’ll be your job to keep me safe.” You smile at him as his eyebrows raise in surprise. “And you can’t do that if you’re dead, can you? So, survive. To protect me.”
“Don’t worry too much about it,” he smiles at you, “I can’t let you die before I do.”
April 19th, 667 – Yangdeok, Kingdom of Silla By the first of the month, you get news that Goguryeo is expecting the assault on Pyongyang. They began reinforcing their walls and reports say that many of the cityfolk fled the city in a want to not get caught in the fighting. 
Xu Minghao reunites with his fleet in Cholsan, Junhi leads the men who have been assigned to navigate Kangdong Pass to reach Pyongyang, while Kun has been assigned to the men at Haegok Pass. You accompany Kun where you wait for the enemy’s resistance. 
Even though the snow has long since melted, the weather still gets quite cold at night. To rouse the men, Kun has brought several large jugs of yakju. 
“The battle’s going to start soon,” he says as he pours the men cups of liquor, “I’ll be counting on you guys. We can’t afford to rest, unfortunately, but I figured you could have something to warm you up. I’d like to give you guys as much as you want, but we don’t know when those bastards are gonna show up.”
After he’s emptied the supply, you and he walk together back to his tent. 
“Kun, are you alright?” You ask, rubbing at your nose so it doesn’t begin to run.
“What do you mean by that?” He turns to look at you, the empty jugs clinking together in his hands.
“You’re not drunk, are you?” You look at the aforementioned jugs.
“That’s it?” He laughs, “I had one cup, I can hold my liquor, promise.” The smile slips from his face and he looks off into the distance, “They’re almost like kids to me. Not much I can do for them personally on the battlefield, seems like a little yakju is the least I can give them.”
The two passes are the last line of Goguryeo defense before the city itself, this would be an important undertaking to take these points if the Silla-Tang plan is to go smoothly. 
“I’m sure they understand,” you nod, setting down the jug you’re holding beside his tent.
“You always say what I want to hear,” he says softly, setting down his next to yours. 
April 30th, 667 – Anjinham Fortress, Kingdom of Silla With the warming weather, comes battle. Junhui and his men are routed at Kangdong, letting Kun’s forces push through with concerted effort towards the fortress at the mouth of Haegok Pass. Beyond these walls and field beyond is where the final battle will take place.
Everything has gone well, just as Kun had predicted all those weeks ago. Before the night ends, Kun requests your presence in his quarters.
“Are you going to be up for much longer?” He tilts his head as you approach, “You should sleep soon, there are long days ahead.”
“I know,” you have to try and stifle a yawn, “but… “ As the days press on toward the final assault on Pyongyang, days like this in relative closeness to Kun become more and more sparse. All you want is to cherish every moment with him while you still can, so you linger for a moment longer. Before you’re able to finish your thought, a visitor arrives.
“Chief, are you here?” The muffled voice of Jeno speaks out. 
“Yeah, I am,” Kun responds, “Come in.” As Jeno enters you look to him, Kun questioning, “What’s the matter?”
“There’s something that just couldn’t wait, something I need to give you, Kun.” Jeno says, his hands fumbling with a rolled up scroll in his hands. He holds it out to Kun, “Here…”
When Kun realizes what he’s looking at, his eyes grow wide and he stares intently at it. “Did… Did Kunhang draw this? Why are you giving it to me?”
“When we were in Ungjin some time ago I went to see him…” Jeno confesses, “And that’s what I told him, I told him to show all of you where he’s been… To show you the life he’s led and experienced. And so, not long ago, he sent me this drawing. As soon as I saw it I thought it best to give it to you.”
“I’ll take this,” Kun says after a moment, solemnly smiling at him, “Thank you, Jeno.”
Without another word, the younger one turns with a bow and leaves the room. Kun gives a curt smile, exhaling as he plops back into his chair. 
“What was that all about?” You ask, looking at Kun reviewing the drawing, “What is that?” The minute you see it, the vivid brushstrokes on the page evokes a small gasp and a feeling of magnificence from you. “A Fury…?”
Painted onto the scroll is the depiction of a Fury, complete with white hair and crimson eyes. Within those eyes, however, is none of the murderous rage you’ve come to expect in Furies. A peculiar kindness is imbued into them, “Who is this?”
“Well, this was the Chief of the Hwarang, but that hasn’t been in a long, long time.” Kun guffaws, “The bastard would get into skirmishes with merchants, nobles, and commoners. Then go partying in Noseo-dong when he was finished. His name was Zhang Yixing. When  he was still kicking around, I don;t think I ever got a good night’s rest. Always had to get into some bullshit.”
Everything he describes to you about Yixing seems incongruent to the kind-looking image of the man on the page.
“Actually, funny to think about it now, but I remember spending every day thinking of ways to fuck with him. Then, he told me something… ‘If you want any chance of pushing Taeil to to the top, you need to become the ‘Demon’ you were born to be.’” Kun hums, “And I took his word for it, then I took his life when it seemed being a Fury was too much for him.”
“Pushing Taeil to the top…” You can’t begin to imagine bearing the responsibility of killing the man who was supposed to be your leader, and you realize how dire those straits must’ve been.
“I have a feeling that night Yixing knew, somehow, that I was going to take his life.” Kun’s eyes are locked with your own for a minute of dull silence before falling back to gaze on the drawing. “Strangely enough, the same look he gave me as I killed him is the one drawn here.”
“Huh?” The man you see on the page looks so warm and gentle, and in no way did you interpret his expression as belonging to someone expecting to meet their demise. 
“You know, come to think of it, I could probably credit the bastard for giving me the kick in the ass needed to get my shit together.” Kun smirks, “If I let the Hwarang half-ass their way to power, who knows what kind of shit Yixing’ll have to say to me in the afterlife.”
When it comes to people who’ve made a considerable impression on Kun, Taeil is one of the first people to come to mind. Yet, it seems as if Kun holds a special place for Yixing as well, and you can hear the admiration. 
“I don’t know what the hell fate’s trying to tell me,” his arms cross, “but he visited me in my dream last night.” 
“What kind of dream was it?”
“Well, we weren’t speaking to one another,” Kun nods down to the painting, “But he seemed at peace, not too unlike how he looks on this… It was like his eyes were telling me to let go. Let go of the pain, the burden…”
May 8th, 667 – Ajinham Fortress, Kingdom of Silla As the men come in and out of the fortress, Kun is dead set on making sure everyone and all equipment is up to par for the days ahead. A certain group of incoming soldiers does catch him off guard– 
“Hello, Chief!” Shotaro greets with a smile.
“Everything’s going to plan,” Jeno smiles as he bounds up alongside him, “We’ll have the city in no time.”
“I’m glad to see you all safe…” You sigh out in relief.
“Of course they are,” Kun says, looking at the pair, “The battle’s not even started yet.”
“It’s nice of you to be concerned for us,” Jeno blushes sheepishly. 
“I’m glad you’re doing well too. How are things with you?” Shotaro asks.
“Great,” you shoot a glance at Kun, “He’s allowed me to stick around as usual. I’m not sure if I can live up to the bar you set, but I’m doing my best!”
“Nah,” Shotaro shakes his head, “Nobody can do what you do.”
“He’s right,” Jeno nods fervently, “The only person in the world that can defeat Kun is you.”
“Knock it off, guys,” Kun chuckles, “This is all going to go to her head and then I’ll be the one to deal with it.”
“Apologies, sir,” Shotaro says, “It can’t be helped.”
After some time, Kun fixes his gaze on Jeno, “Thanks for stopping by with the painting.”
“There’s no need to thank me, I’m confident that Kunhang is happy you have it.” 
“Hmph, maybe it’s time for me to stop being such a hardass all the time.” Kun nods, “Hey, I’m leaving the rest to you.”
The words don’t register for Jeno at first, and he blinks incredulously with a nervous chuckle, “...Um… What do you mean by that?” Kun smiles back kindly, staring back at Jeno with eyes that brim with warmth. After a second, Jeno perks up and his eyes widen, finally realizing what he means, “Understood. Please leave everything to me.”
Kun nods curtly, perhaps satisfied with the confidence in his reply, “Osaki, do me a favor. Can you call Junhui? I have some words for him.” 
A few minutes later, Shotaro returns with Wen Junhui at his side.
“Sorry for taking so long to get here… They put up a hell of a fight at Kangdong,” Junhui apologizes. 
“We split our forces, we got screwed a bit because of it but we brought it back in the end.” Kun nods slowly, “All that matters now is concentrating our men on the front gates of the city.”
“We’ll take it no matter the cost,” Shotaro nods firmly.
“As long as we fight under the Hwarang banner we’ll fight to the very last man!” Jeno says quickly.
“Don’t say shit like that– Did you already forget that Junhui’s in command going forward?” Kun frowns.
“I’ll raise the Hwarang’s standard for this battle. Then everything should be fine, right?” Junhui asks, “So long as it’s up, I don’t think I could falter. I’ve lost a few battles here and there, sure, but I’ve never given up on the spirit of a warrior.”
“Hah,” Kun smiles at him, “Now the Army Minister’s superstitious? You need to get your act together, Wen.” That’s when you realize that all four of them are smiling. “We should get going,” Kun looks to you, “the men aren’t going to move themselves.”
“Alright…” You say, looking back to the other men, “I’ll see you all again soon.”
As you’re walking away, Shotaro shouts out, “I’m entrusting you with Kun!”
Ever since the war had begun, you’re unsure of how many times people have said this to you. You turn to look over your shoulder at him, “I’ll do my best! I’m ready to lay down my life just like anyone in the Hwarang!”
“You don’t need to risk your life,” Shotaro shakes his head as you turn fully to look at him, Kun continuing on behind you,, “I want you to protect Kun’s heart. He’s a strong man, but he hides behind that strength and he suffers alone. He needs someone who can look past that, and be there to support him. I believe that someone is you.”
To stay by Kun’s side and support him is all that you want… “Can I really do that?” Soon you’ll be plunged into a violent and bloody battle. How much help can you be to him in the middle of a war?
“What are you talking about?!” Jeno saysm “No one else except for you can do it!” 
“Kun trusts you more than anyone else,” Shotaro smiles.
“Alright…” No one else can stand by him in the days to come. You nod firmly and wave to them one last time before rushing back to Kun’s side.
May 10th, 667 – Ajinham Fortress, Kingdom of Silla You’re sitting quietly in Kun’s study when he suddenly says, “We’re going to attack tomorrow.”
“Right…” You nod slowly. You’ve been on Pyongyang’s doorstep for weeks now, the battle is inevitable. When the sun rises the next day, the area will become a battlefield. 
“Are you sure–” 
“Yes, I’m going to stay with you.” However the battle ends, you intend to be there with him when it does.
“I need to stop letting you say it all the time…” His expression is solemn, but his lips are pressed tightly together and you can feel his hesitation. Kun’s eyes stare back into yours.
“Um…” The silence drags on and on.
“More than anything else, I want to keep you safe.” His voice is low, quiet, “I’m… I think I’m in love with you.” 
Your mouth hangs open, the question you had intended to ask now forgotten. You’ve loved Kun for some time by now, and in the past months you’ve begun to realize how much he cares for you as well. For a moment, you think you’re heart is going to stop.
He gives you a crooked smile, reaching out to close your mouth, his fingers lingering under your chin, “I thought I could just die as soon as I’d done what I had to do for the Hwarang.” 
The words linger in your ears and you can feel just how much has been weighing down his heart. It seems as if he’s trying to assuage your anxieties as he speaks in a soothing tone, “I mean, it’s not like I had a death wish or anything. I just… wouldn’t have anything to live for anymore.” His hand drops from your chin and into his lap, “So long as I led the Hwarang and made them into what they were meant to be, what did it matter if I lived or died? … But now I’ve got a reason to live.”
You feel your shoulders relax from a tension you didn’t realizing you’ve been holding. 
“Because you’re by my side… It gives me a reason to keep moving forward.”
“Me…?” As you struggle to comprehend your worth to him, you squeeze your fists together. 
Kun reaches out and embraces you, holding you tightly without saying a word, he opens his mouth as if he was going to say something, then closes it. There isn’t a need for words in this moment. At last, his stubborn heart opens, and through his lips pours out what it has long kept hidden. His touch is gentle as ripples on a lake but when you kiss, you feel within  him a passion that burns so hot it could put a forge to shame. 
And though that feeling fades as your lips part, the love that flows between you remains in your heart.
“Continue to stay by me,” he says softly, pressing his forehead against yours, “I won’t let you go even if you want to, so be prepared.”
“Of course, Kun,” you respond quietly, his hand raising to brush away the tears you didn’t realize were falling. 
May 11th, 667 – Ajinham Fortress, Kingdom of Silla Once the first and second wave of Junhui’s troops leaves, Kun decides to travel with the men stationed in the third group.
“You’re coming, right?” Kun asks you as he walks to you, the reigns of his horse in hand as it trots alongside him. 
“Yes!” You nod and he grins back at you. 
The two of you gallop through the valley, moving at an incredible pace.It seems to be going well until something impacts Kun’s body, the horse, surprised by the sudden jolt rears up and throws you to the ground. Rid of its frightening burden, the horse bolts.
You’re fortunate to have landed in a small area of brush, only a few small scratches littering your body. “Kun!” You cry out to him, crawling across the ground toward his body, your own bruised and aching. The soil around him is staining red, more blood than you’d seen over the course of your time in the Hwarang.
Terror grips you and you can hear blood hammering in your ears.
“Kun!” You call out to him again, shaking his body as you call his name again and again.
“Hm?” His brow furrows ever so slightly. A normal human would have died from this– but his Fury blood is keeping him alive, if only barely.
“Say something!”
His eyes open to thin slits, “Are you alright?” Near dead and undoubtedly in serious pain, and his first thought is about your safety. “We’re in trouble if they come back to finish the job. We need to get out of here and wait for this to heal.” He struggles to his feet and begins to walk, blood dripping down the length of his body.
“Stop!” You say and haul his arm around your shoulder, and he leans against it gratefully. Scanning over the vicinity, you cannot see any enemy soldiers. Perhaps they’d seen you fall from the horse and assumed you’d died. 
Nudging Kun, you push him to move into the brush away from the open air. In the forest you find a grove and settle down, “Kun, are you okay?” 
He rests under the trunk of a large tree, a steady flow of blood leaving him. One might guess him dead from his pale complexion, “I guess so…”
“We need to do what we can to stop the bleeding…” It takes a sheer force of will to stop your fingers from shaking as you carefully peel off his clothing. Revealing his chest, you see two arrow punctures, one near his heart and one on his stomach. “This is horrible…” You murmur, thanking whatever deity’s out there that the archer had missed his heart. 
You do what you can to staunch the bleeding, but without the proper tools you can only minimally patch him up, “As soon as you’re able to move again, we need to go back to the fortress.” With no response you call out to him again, “Kun…? Can you hear me?”
“Urg, yeah…” His breaths are heavy, “I don’t know if I can go back out there on my own yet.”
“Okay!” You say, knowing you need to keep him awake. “Shotaro and the others have everything under control. They’ll be waiting for you.”
“Damn r-right they will…” Sweat pours from his forehead, “They’re not Hwarang for nothing… We can;t waste too much time though, we– we have to come back and cover them while they take the gate.”
“You’re right… you’re… You’re going to make it,,” however the spots where he’d been shot don’t look like they’ll be closing any time soon. Had they used silver arrowheads? “Kun…?” His eyes close you begin to panic, “Kun!”
“Goddamn  it… S-stop making a scene. I can hear you, alright?” His voice is barely above a murmur– it’s practically a wispy breath. 
At once, a sense of clarity washes over you– he’s a Fury. “Kun. You need to drink my blood.” Without any doubts, you move your blade to your wrist. 
“Stop it!” The force of his command startles you, and the blade drops to the forest floor. In his condition, he shouldn’t be able to scream this loudly. 
“Why–?!”
“Spare me,” he says through grit teeth, “I’ll be okay. I’m not going to let this crap kill me… This isn’t the end, I told you that. You’re… you’re the reason I’m alive. I’m fine, I won’t die here.”
“I don’t believe you.” You frown, “I believe that you want to live and don’t plan on dying here. But you’re not ‘fine’!” He blinks incredulously, perhaps taken aback by the intensity of your glare. “So, I’m mot taking your word for it. You always put up a wall and pretend everything is ‘fine’ even when you’re bursting at the seams!”
You’re determined to get your way just this once. And maybe this time, you’ve gotten through to him.
“Some lady you are…” He chuckles weakly, “I’m starting to second guess why I fell for you. Ugh, this is why they say women from the countryside are trouble…”
“Look, I promise you can give me grief for this later, but for now, please…” Before you finish, Kun closes his eyes in silent resignation.
“Do as you wish…” He leans gently against the tree carefully. You pick up your blade, running it across the length of your wrist.You put your lips against the cut, sipping in a large gulp of blood without swallowing.  You then lean over, pressing your lips against his and let the blood flow into his mouth. 
Perhaps its his Fury instincts kicking in that allow him to accept the blood as readily as he does. You repeat the process of this blood transfer over and over again. You’re about to do it one more time when his hand reaches out to stop you. 
“That’s enough,” he says calmly, “I’ve stopped bleeding.” His cheeks, once pale and pallid, begin to show color once more. “You’ve gone and hurt yourself for me…”
“It’ll heal soon…” you say, hiding the cut with the sleeve of your robes. 
“What kind of absolute idiot would ever allow the woman he loves to hurt herself for his sake?” He sighs out, “Try putting yourself in my shoes for once.” After all of that trouble, the first thing he does is scold you… You can’t help but burst into laughter.
“What kind of absolute idiot would ever want to watch the man she loves suffer?”
“Oh, shut up…” He says as you continue to laugh.
After another handful of minutes he brushes himself off and rises to his feet.
“We’ve got to get going,” he says, pulling his robes back together. “Let’s head back to the fortress. Oh– and by the way, I’d prefer the next time we kissed to taste a little bit better than that did.” He chuckles as you help him start walking. His body isn’t great, but it’s enough to get you back.
Once you get back to the fortress, you’re met with a startling site. Perhaps you hadn’t noticed them bloom, or they’d come into their own while you were away, but the azalea bushes surrounding the fortress have sprung to life. 
Their petals dance in the sunlit breeze, fluttering like small butterflies. The area is empty, the men away fighting at Pyongyang…
“Kun, how are you feeling?”
He forces a small grin. As a Fury, he should be fully healed by now. Dejun’s words about the Fury’s borrowing their power from their future lifespan suddenly comes to mind. You slowly begin to panic, becoming paralyzed with dread over the implications of this realization. Is this the end for Kun?
He breaks the silence, interrupting your anxiety, “You don’t look half bad surrounded by flowers.”
“You really think so?” You muse, “I’ve alway thought they really suited you, though.” Each falled blossom is strikingly beautiful in defiance of the tragic end they’ll surely face. 
A strong gust of wind blows through the clearing. And then, out of nowhere, a figure emerges from the treeline.
“So, you were alive…” Lee Donghyuck’s eyes fall on Kun and his mouth curls up into a smile. 
“Why…?” Your voice breaks and the Demon only laughs.
“This man is an affront to my honor.” He says simply, “I’m here to put an end to all of this.”
The last you’d seen Donghyuck, he warned you that he’d return. You didn’t think that he would forsake his clan and travel all the way here just to fight Kun.
“I’m surprised to see you make it this far,” Donghyuck mutters. “Impressive, for a fake. I heard your pathetic friends got their asses kicked until it was just you standing. I’m not sure if being born into a warrior family… Or hell, even being born as a Demon, could help you survive the embarrassment of failing as often as you fools do.”
It’s strange… his tone is as derisive as usual, but his words are almost compliments. In some way, he recognizes what Kun’s been through.
“Didn’t think you’d come all the way to Pyongyang.” Kun crosses his arms, his voice still a bit raspy. “What were you gonna do if I ate it already? You would’ve wasted your time.”
Donghyuck’s face screws into a twisted grin and he draws his sword.  
“He’s hurt!” You cry, stepping between the two men. 
However, Kun puts his arm in front of you and moves you, “Step back. He’s thrown everything away to come fight me, right? It’s only polite of me to accept the invitation to fight a warrior of his quality.”
Donghyuck practically abandoned his clan. This, up until now, seems to be his entire lids, just for the sake of defending his honor.
Kun and he are two different men in almost every way, but perhaps they share a warrior’s pride.
“I’ll be fine,” Kun tells you as he reaches for his sword, “I won’t die. I already told you: I have a reason to live.”
If he fights Donghyuck, then surely by then his life’ll be up. Even if you can convince him to run, then everything he’s stood and lived for will be destroyed. But you can’t stop him.
“...I’ll watch, then. I believe in you.”
Kun’s smile is fleeting like the blossoms scattering at your feet.
“Furies are only imitations,” Donghyuck says, brandishing his sword, “The more you use those powers, the shorter your life gets. You’re nothing compared to a pure-blooded Demon. You are destined to wither and die. You’re no different than these,” his show skids across the ground, swirling the azalea petals around.
“A man’s gotta protect the people he cares about. It’s not so easy to be a warrior, didn’t you know?” His tone indicates that he’s speaking seriously, but a sardonic grin dances along his lips. Watching him now makes you see just how much he’s given, every drop of sweat, blood and tears in his life to protect the ones he loves.
“Perhaps the name of ‘Fury’ no longer suits you.” Donghyuck says, his gaze narrowing, “The life you strive to live is not that of a fake.” There’s no hint of contempt left in those red eyes of his, full of confidence. “You are a Demon.”
The man who takes so much in being a Demon calling a Fury, a ‘fake’, a Demon… For him that’s possibly the highest compliment he can ever give.
 “I take back all the crap I gave you for being a fake. If you’re really ready to take on the life of a Demon, that means you must have a Demon’s name. I name you… Dùjuān huā jīngshén.”
You think back to the first night you met Kun, his hair whipping around his face as snow falls around him like these monstrous azalea blooms do… It seems almost as if the name had been chosen long, long ago; so perfectly befitting of him.
“Thanks, I guess, but I’m not doing this so you’ll call me a Demon, you know.” Kun’s mouth quirks upward into a smile as he slides his sword from its sheath. With a sigh, his body shivers and suddenly his hair is white.
“Can’t play long, though. That a problem?”
“Not at all. I’ll kill you with the first blow.”
The air is tense between the two; not a soul can come between them. A wind blows up, casting scores of petals into the air. Between the two combatants, there’s a brief moment of stillness. If only for a second, their swords meet. The two trade blows that thunder through the field around you, slashing with their full body weight.
Donghyuck’s sword passes within a hair's breadth of Kun, but the Hwarang had found his mark.He buries his sword deep into the Demon’s heart.
“There’s still something I’ve got to protect,” Kun murmurs slowly, his voice full of confident authority,  “I can’t lose, not even to a Demon.”
Donghyuck gazes up at the clear blue sky, and you can almost see a faint grunt creep onto his face. 
His lips move, “If my end were to be met with the blade of a Demon like yourself… Then I have no regrets… I have lived my life with honor, and I die with the same.” Donghyuck’s eyes are free of hostility, if anything, he seems at peace. To die in a duel against a foe he respects… “You’ve defeated me. Now you must live out what you have left, Qian Kun.”
Those are his last words. 
Kun draws his sword from Donghyuck’s body as it falls, dropping the still bloody sword back into its scabbard, “... I will.” Then his body trembles for a moment, and he gasps before falling to his knees.
“Kun!” You shout and run to his side. As he lies on his back, you take his hands into yours, “Please hang in there!” Your desperate screams reverberate around you, but Kun can only manage an uncertain lip curl.
“Man, you always have to cry, don’t you?” Kun smiles up at you, his voice weak, “If you don’t get thicker  skin, there’s no way you’ll be able to handle being married to a warrior…” He winces with near every word and your heart clenches at the pain he must be in. 
“I only cry because of you… And besides, being married to a warrior doesn’t make you impervious to watching the person you love get hurt.” Teardrops stream down your cheeks, dripping down on his bruised face. He reaches his hand unsteadily upward to wipe your flowing tears, kindly running a finger across your cheek. 
“D- Don’t worry… You won’t ever have to cry on my behalf again. Just let me spend whatever time I have left with you beside me. I want to enjoy it…” Kun’s eyes quietly shut. You hold tightly onto his blood soaked body, hugging him closely as the blood seeps into your robes. Bright blossoms dance cooly around you as you look to the sky.
June 15th, 667 – Toehwa-hyeon, Kingdom of Silla Kun never made it to the gates or siege of Pyongyang. He never saw the fall of Yeon Gaesomun or the Unification of Silla. You hear later that it was Wen Junhui who brokered for a sated peace between Tang and Silla, at least for the time being.
The Tang reclaimed Minghao and his ships as soon as they could, returning him to their capital to bestow honors and titles on him. Somehow, Shotaro made it through the battle, despite having been on the front line. When you asked what he intended to do, he laughed and said he’d probably open a swordsmanship school in Seorabeol. Jeno, on the other hand, was entrusted by Kun with the Hwarang, returned to Seorabeol to try and rebuild what men they have left. As for Jungwoo, before the battle of Pyongyang, took his own life with a concoction of opium. You suppose he would have seen his life as forfeit if he couldn’t continue being a warrior… 
From the stoop of your home, you watch the blooms of flowers lining the road before you, recalling everything that had occurred up north. 
How many men had given their lives for what they believed in…? Perhaps most of all, you remember the time spent with Kun. Every time you come across an abundance of them, they remind you of that dreamlike spring, so far removed from it, you’re left to wonder if you really had spent all that time with him.
“You really like those flowers, don’t you?” A voice murmurs out from beside you, a mass of warmth pressing against you as another body squeezes into the doorframe.
“Yeah.” Neither the Yuchae nor the sansuyu can compare. “I like them because they remind me of you.”
Kun looks at you in a serene contemplation for a moment, then lets his grin spread across his face into a smile, “Well, I like them too. They look good on you.” His voice, soft and quiet, throws your mind into chaos.
“Lately, I’ve been worried about the end…” He hums, noting your confusion, “I never get bored when I’m with you. Sometimes, I wish I could live forever.”
As a Fury, Kun has spent his future in exchange for power in the present. How much he’s spent, you don’t know. His life could end tomorrow. If he could live forever, then that fear of the unknown will disappear. 
“It’d probably be an easy way to go… to accept that I’m used up and wither away. But there’s no need for me to ask for an end. Since I want to live, I'll fight for survival. That suits me better.”
“I don’t want to be apart,” you say, your hand holding onto the sleeve of his robes. “I want to stay with you for as long as I can.”
He chuckles, “You cry so easily, I’d feel pretty bad if I left you behind.”
“Oh…” Tears had begun to run down your cheek without you noticing at first. You blink in surprise, but that hardly helps. You raise your hand to wipe them away but he grins and stops you.
“I’ll get them for you,” he says softly, gently drying them with his fingers. “It’s my job to help you.”
“Then it’s my job to support you too.”
“Of course, who else could fit that role aside from you?” He murmurs with a smile, “No matter what I do to drive you away, you won’t go. You even followed me to Pyongyang. I lost to you… and I don’t think I can ever win.”
You want to hold on to this moment of him, the memory, for as long as you can. 
77 notes · View notes
sweetestofchaos · 2 years
Photo
Tumblr media
𝖲𝗎𝗆𝗆𝖺𝗋𝗒: 𝖪𝗎𝗇 𝗅𝗈𝗏𝖾𝖽 𝗒𝗈𝗎 𝖺 𝗅𝗈𝗍. 𝖡𝗎𝗍 𝗅𝗈𝗏𝖾 𝖼𝖺𝗇 𝗈𝗇𝗅𝗒 𝗀𝗈 𝗌𝗈 𝖿𝖺𝗋. 𝖯𝖺𝗂𝗋𝗂𝗇𝗀𝗌: 𝖪𝗎𝗇 𝗑 𝖡𝗅𝖺𝖼𝗄 𝖱𝖾𝖺𝖽𝖾𝗋 𝖺𝗇𝖽 𝖬𝗂𝗇𝗀𝗒𝗎 𝗑 𝖡𝗅𝖺𝖼𝗄 𝖱𝖾𝖺𝖽𝖾𝗋 𝖶𝖺𝗋𝗇𝗂𝗇𝗀𝗌: 𝖲𝖥𝖶 - 𝖠𝗇𝗀𝗌𝗍 - 𝖢𝗁𝖾𝖺𝗍𝗂𝗇𝗀  - 𝖢𝗋𝗒𝗂𝗇𝗀 - 𝖭𝗈 𝗁𝖺𝗉𝗉𝗒 𝖾𝗇𝖽𝗂𝗇𝗀 𝖶𝗈𝗋𝖽 𝖢𝗈𝗎𝗇𝗍: 𝟤K
ᔆᵒⁿᵍ ⁻ ᴵ ᴰᵒⁿ'ᵗ ᵂᵃⁿⁿᵃ ᴷⁿᵒʷ ~ ᴹᵃʳⁱᵒ ᵂⁱⁿᵃⁿˢ
Tumblr media
“Where you going all dressed up?” Kun peers into the phone screen over the rim of his glasses. Y/N smiles as she puts a layer of shimmering lip gloss on. “Is that a new gloss?”
“Yep!” Y/N pops the ‘p’ and giggles. “My Pat McGrath order came today. Do you like it babe?” Y/N pokes her lips out making a duck face and Kun smiles with a nod of his head.
“It’s beautiful on you, my star.”
Y/N grins and stares at Kun, “I miss you, boo.”
Kun sighs and runs a hand through his dark hair. “It’s only a few more days. I’ll be home by the end of the week. Now, tell me again where you are going?”
“Me?” Y/N fixes the gold chain around her neck that hold a small diamond at the hallow of her throat. “Ashlee invited me out. We’re gonna hang out with a few of the other girls from the office.”
“Yeah? Take a shot for me, okay?”
Y/N laughs and nods her head. “I’ll be sure to text you when I get back home. I love you, Kun.”
“I love you more, my star.”
Kun kisses the tips of his fingers and presses them to the phone screen to which Y/N giggles and blows a kiss before she hangs up. Y/N stares at the blank screen and sighs softly. Hanging with the girls? It was a lie she didn’t have to tell but she knew that Kun wouldn’t question her if she included her best friend in the scenario. Shaking her head, Y/N pulls her wedding ring from her finger and sets it in her jewelry box before she stands and smooth out the fitted green dress she’s wearing. The doorbell rings and Y/N quickly grabs her black heels and purse before she skips to the front door. Unlock the door, Y/N opens it and smiles wide.
“Hello, gorgeous.”
“Hey, handsome!” Y/N purrs and she giggles as large hands rest on her hips before she’s pulled into a strong chest.
“You all set to head out?”
“Just need to put my shoes on.” Y/N holds up her heels and bites her lower lip when the man in front of her takes them from her hand.
“Allow me.” Y/N watches as the man squat in front of her and carefully place her feet into the heels before he tightens the straps around her ankles. “Too tight?”
Y/N shakes her head and places her hand on the back of the man’s neck as he stands to his full height. “Such a gentleman,” she teases, and the man smiles as he leans down slightly to capture Y/N’s lips in a light kiss.
“You know you love it, gorgeous.”
“I love you, Mingyu.”
Mingyu smiles and pushes his brown hair from his face, “I love you more.”
Tumblr media
Kun smiles when the apartment building comes into view. He cannot wait to see y/n’s smiling face and fall asleep in her embrace. The taxi pulls over to the curb and Kun thanks him before he hands over a few bills and quickly gets out. The driver pops the trunk and Kun grabs his luggage, slamming the trunk closed and with a wave of his hand he sends the taxi driver away. Pushing his hair from his face, Kun makes his way into the building and bows his head slightly to the couple that is getting their mail.
Making his way to the elevator, Kun looks down at the watch on his wrist. Y/N should be home from work now. If he’s lucky enough, Kun will catch her fresh out the shower. The thought makes blood rush to his member, and he bites his lip. He’s missed Y/N so much and he cannot wait to reacquaint himself with her body. The elevator opens to the fifth floor, and he steps out, a little pep in his step as he nearly runs to the front door. Pulling his key from his pocket, Kun unlocks the door and steps into the apartment, shutting the door behind himself silently. He toes off his shoes and pauses when he notices that Y/N’s shoes aren’t in the cubby.
Glancing down at his watch one more time, Kun frowns then sighs. Guess she went out with her coworkers or maybe she stopped by the market. Placing his shoes in the cubby, Kun picks his luggage up and heads to the laundry room. He unloads all the dirty clothes into the washer and starts it up before he walks to the bedroom and strips down to his boxers. Digging around in his dresser, Kun grabs a pair of sweatpants and slips them on before he looks around for his house slippers. They weren’t by the front door, which is odd, but Y/N tends to move things and not put them back when she’s cleaning. Squatting down, Kun lowers himself onto his hands and knees, using his phone’s flashlight to cheek to see if his slippers are underneath the bed.
Kun sees his slippers and rolls his eyes as he laughs. Leave it to Y/N to move them somewhere unseen. Reaching under the bed, Kun grabs his slippers and pulls them out. He tilts his head to side when a blue piece of fabric is attached to the slippers. “What…?” Kun picks up the blue fabric and he’s feeling very confused. This is part of the lingerie set that Jun got Y/N right before he left…why is it under the bed? Holding the lace material, I his hands, Kun frowns when he sees the large hole in the fabric that’s supposed to cover Y/n’s butt. Licking his lips, Kun stands to his feet and sits on the bed. He can’t stop looking at the panties in his hands. Why are they under the bed and why are they ruined? Kun’s fingers twitch and he closes his hand into a tight fist as a single thought crosses his mind. Y/N went out with her friends. Did she come back alone?
“No, she wouldn’t do that to me.” Kun shakes his head trying to ignore the ugly feeling growing in his heart. Looking down at the panties in his fist, Kun clicks his tongue and stands up. He tosses the ruined panties into his sock drawer and slips on his house slippers before he leaves the bedroom and walks into the kitchen. Opening the fridge, Kun sighs. The fridge is fully stocked, so Y/N didn’t go to the market. Weighing his options, Kun decides to order out and sit in the living room to catch up on some TV. It helps take his mind off the possibility of his wife cheating on him…
Tumblr media
Kun woke up to the sound of whispered voiced followed by the soft slam of the front door. He kept his breathing steady and strained his ears, hearing Y/N’s soft foot falls paddle across the floor and right into their bedroom. His heart beat painfully in his chest when he heard the shower turn on. Kun counted to twenty before he got up and walked into the bathroom. He cleared his throat and rubbed at his eyes, pretending that he just woke up.
Y/N jumped and turned around in the shower to face her husband, “Baby!  When did you come back? You should have called me.”
Kun forces a yawn from his mouth and shrugs his shoulders, “I wanted to surprise you, my star.” Kun leans on the edge of the sink and crosses his arms over his chest. “Why didn’t you wake me up when you came in? We could’ve showered together.”
“Oh.” Y/N shakes her head with a small laugh. “I just came back from the gym. I’m all gross and sweaty. You wouldn’t want to shower with me like this.”
Kun nods his head at Y/N’s answer. “Who came up with you? I heard you talking to someone at the door.”
“The door…oh!” Y/N sticks her head under the water to rise the shampoo from her hair. “I went with a few coworkers. We made plans to come back to my place for a few drinks, but the moment I saw your shoes I knew that wasn’t a good idea. I figured you would be tired, so…”
“How thoughtful of you, my star.” Kun couldn’t believe how easy it was for Y/N to lie to him. He may have been half asleep, but he knows the difference between one or more voices, plus the single voice he heard was clearly male. “I have to switch over my clothes. Do you need anything, my star?”
“You should rest some more, boo. I can switch over your clothes once I’m done showering.”
Tumblr media
Kun laid on the couch with his head resting on Y/N’s lap while she played with his hair. He wasn’t paying much attention to the movie on the screen, his mind was elsewhere. The moment Y/N got out of the shower, Kun noticed something was missing and he silently debated with himself if he wanted to speak up on it or not. Ignoring the movie, Kun grabs hold of Y/N’s left hand and laces their fingers together. He stares at the empty space on her ring finger and sighs.
“Where’s your ring, my star?”
“Huh?” Y/N’s eyes widen as Kun raises their connected hands showing off her naked finger. “I-it’s in the shop getting cleaned. I’ll be able to pick it up tomorrow.”
“The shop is closed tomorrow, my star. They are never open on Sunday’s.”
Right, I forgot. Thank you for reminding me. I’ll pick it up on my way home from work, Monday.”
Tumblr media
Tears blur Kun vision as he sits at the kitchen counter with his phone clenched tightly in his hand. A friend of his from work sent him a photo of Y/N out with a man that Kun has never seen before. Kun wanted to chalk it up to the man being a coworker, but the way Y/N and the man were holding hands and leaning against each other, Kun knew the truth. He wanted to scream at Y/N, he wanted to smash his fist into the man’s handsome face over and over again. Why, Y/N? Huh? Why go after his wife? There were plenty of single women in the world, so why go after his wife? Kun hated himself for thinking that way, he knew it was wrong. The fault laid with Y/N and no one else. He couldn’t do this anymore.
Pushing away from the counter, Kun goes into his office and sits at his desk. He grabs the memo book and a pen before he starts to scribble out his feelings. Tears fall and land on the desk, his wrists, and his upper thighs each time he blinks, trying to clear his vision. How could Y/N hurt him like this? Did she even love him at all? Kun can’t stay here, he can’t sit back and watch as his wife ignores her vows, he can’t keep pretending that he doesn’t know. Wiping the snot from his nose with the back of his hand, Kun stares down at the letter on his desk with a frown. Some of the words are smeared from his tears, but it’s still legible. Taking a deep breath, Kun sits back and calls his lawyer, he asks for the older man to type up divorce papers and email him a copy.
Once that phone call is complete, Kun calls a hotel and rents a room for the next two weeks. He won’t be staying with Y/N anymore. He won’t give her the pleasure of seeing him so broken. An alrt from his phone, lets Kun know that the papers have been emailed and he prints them out from his laptop. Ripping the letter from the memo book, Kun makes his way to the bedroom with the papers in his hands. He sets them on the bed and packs two bags, he will have to come back at some point for the rest of his stuff, but that can wait. Kun sets the divorce papers down and the letter on top of Y/N’s dresser, and he slowly twists the ring from his finger. He stares at the golden band, emotionless for only a second before he sets it on top of the tear stand letter.
“Goodbye, my star.”
31 notes · View notes
theficblog · 2 years
Text
NOW AND THEN
Tumblr media
LIU YANGYANG
Prologue: Yangyang has been your on-again, off-again boyfriend for quite some time, but there is always one last hope.
Genre: Fluff + Exes to lovers
Wordcount: 1,129
Prompts: “When was the last time we had a real conversation.” + “Being in love with you is scary… not that you’re scary, of course, but that I’d fuck this thing up,” + “If this is your way of flirting, you’re doing a terrible job at it.”
Warnings: Mild Language
Tumblr media
This afternoon was beyond dreary. The sky was bland, almost white or whatever other colour it was. You could not bear to look up at the scorching sun. The streets were nearly empty. People were either inside their homes, being all comfortable and escaping the heat, doing whatever pleased them. The other ones were like you, who had by now seen all that Netflix had to offer and still stupidly opted to go out.
You came to the nearby café to delight yourself with some brunch. It turns out that there were a lot more idiots out there, including you, because the place was nearly filled. The din of customers' conversations, the sizzling sounds from the kitchen, and the Rock and Roll music playing in the background. Everything was going swimmingly, just the way you intended it to.
You continued looking for a place to sit upon lifting your meal tray from the counter. On regular days, you had a reserved spot, which was an advantage of being a regular visitor. You didn't want to bother the middle-aged mother with her three petulant children to spare you your seat today.
Thank heavens, you were able to take the last available spot before anyone else. Someone seemed to be seated at your now-shared table, but you had no choice. It wasn't necessary to talk to strangers anyway, your sole focus was on your food.
Random thoughts continued to take over your mind in the meantime. You couldn't restrain yourself from overthinking. Your new job, the house party you attended last weekend, the global population growth rate, and your best friend's goldfish, which her cat devoured. You contemplated everything and anything.
"Y/N" You hear your name being called in a much more familiar voice. Fuck, why did he have to be here? You mentally cursed yourself for coming out today, let alone taking up this spot.
You looked up and elevated your sight to the man. Still clad in black from head to toe despite the scorching weather. His hair was now studded with golden highlights, which was a novel look for him. He stood there with his phone in his hands. You had no option but to confront him.
It was Yangyang.
He had been your on-and-off lover for about three years now. No, you were not a celebrity couple, but complicated relationships were a phenomenon that did not discriminate between the two halves. There were times when you cherished him like Romeo cherished Juliet, and perhaps other times when you despised him like a war enemy.
You drew your gaze away from him and back to your meal. Walking away right now would be a sign of weakness. You weren't weak, and even if you were, you'd despise it if it came through. This was a question about your ego, which was never being compromised with. So what if you had blocked him from all your social medias? So what if you  never picked up his calls? So what if you both had been dead to each other since the last four months?
Yangyang too, probably thought the same as he took the chair right in front of you. He waited for a minute or so for you to utter some words, or at the least, take a look at him, but gave up soon.
"This steak is quite bitter. Over time, their flavour has deteriorated." As he fed himself, he made a random remark.
"Yeah, I guess so." You gave him the dullest response ever.
Silence reigned once more as you reflected on your last breakup with Yangyang.
-
"I don’t really care but I am moving out, my job and my career are way more important than a man. Do you think I am some Damsel in Distress? I can take care of myself!" You raged at him. This was one of the many reasons for breaking up with him. Of course, you had to let your ego win at all costs.
-
"You see that guy, we attended the same school. People change, I think he owns that silver car. At school he was never the type to-"
"When was the last time we had a real conversation?" You questioned him, cutting through his useless words. Maybe this could be another contributing factor to a relationship that kept on failing over and over again. None of you were ready to listen, and the things you talked about did not make much sense either. The most serious thing you and he ever talked about was probably planning a vacation for Christmas.
He stopped with his random comments, not even eating anymore. His eyes were fixed on the rusted wooden table, suggesting it was the stillness before a storm. He had something to say.
"Being in love with you is scary… not that you’re scary, of course, but that I’d fuck this thing up." He expressed.
"We have fucked this thing up more than quite often." You defended yourself. You were not going to buy his opinion that easily.
This was certainly not the first time you both had a conversation like this, you both were aware of how things would take a turn.
"Yes I know we have fucked more than quite often." Yangyang implied, knowing exactly what he was saying.
Your face was still emotionless, as you went down the memory lane again. Maybe you missed him. Maybe it was not a break up but just a prolonged period of fighting. Maybe it was you and not him.
It was hard to let go of someone, no matter how toxic they could get at times.
"Listen, Yangyang, I guess I am sorry." This was your way of admitting your wrong doings.
The boy, on the other hand, was very well aware of this, as he still continued to chew on the steak. "That’s alright." He said.
"We, anyway, have always been a couple, haven’t we?" You try and win his attention, and heart back. Trying the best that you knew of.
"If this is your way of flirting, you’re doing a terrible job at it." Yangyang gave his trademark wide smile.
"Why would I flirt with you?" You revert back immediately.
"Okay then unblock me, at least." He suggested. You gave him the ‘I’m so done with you expression’ as you picked up your phone, unblocking him.
"Yangyang, we are still in love right?" You questioned fearfully, what if it was one sided? What if it doesn’t end well again this time?
"We never fell out of love." He reassured.
Yangyang was your fate. You were destined to stick with him. Yes, your relationship was no less than a rollercoaster, but this time, you were confident that in the end, you both would land safe, together.
Tumblr media
LET ME KNOW YOUR VIEWS + ALSO SEE : MASTERLIST
Tumblr media
PLEASE REFRAIN FROM PLAGIARIZING ,TRANSLATING, OR POSTING OUTSIDE THIS PLATFORM.  
76 notes · View notes
gureumcityrecs · 2 years
Text
qian kun
Tumblr media
wayv masterlist
| ☁ personal fav |
| ♤ oneshot | ♧ smau | | ♡ chapter fics | ♢ headcannons | | ✿ angst | ❅ smut | ✥ fluff |
crazy [♤ ✿] idol!au
15 notes · View notes
xofanfics · 24 days
Text
Lost For Words - Part V
Tumblr media
Part I | Part II | Part III | Part IV
Genre: angst, fluff, smut 🥺🤗🥵
Pairing: Reader x Kun // Reader x Taeyong
Word Count: 5.7K
You were awake but didn’t open your eyes. You’d left the curtains open, you realized. Your eyes slowly fluttered open, bracing yourself for the light. Your eyes snapped open as you were met with the image of a naked Taeyong fast asleep in your bed. If you weren’t awake before, you were certainly wide awake now.
You looked around the room in horror as you recalled the events of the previous night. You replayed the night in your mind, as if it were a film, and how you took your clothes off and how Taeyong ended up between your legs and inside you. And you had the audacity to throb at the thought of him, a wave of guilt washing over you. 
The vibration coming from the nightstand startled you, bringing you back to your harsh reality. Your hands felt a little shaky as you reached for your phone. Without even having to look, you knew it was Kun. Your heart pounded in your chest as you answered the call, your voice trembling slightly.
"Hey, babe," Kun's voice greeted you, laced with concern. "I didn't hear back from you last night, so I wanted to check on you. Are you feeling okay?"
You took a deep breath, your mind racing. You were anything but okay. You were confused, in a daze, and filled to the brim with guilt and remorse. The thought of confessing the truth and his disappointment sent a fresh wave of guilt to crash over you.
"I'm just a little hungover," you said, a half truth. "I think I might take a painkiller and go back to sleep for a little while.” 
"Oh, okay," Kun replied, his voice laced with understanding. He chuckled. "I told you to make sure you drank some water to avoid a hangover! Anyway, just call me when you wake up, alright? I can bring you something to eat later."
"Okay, I will.” 
Your heart was heavy with the weight of your lies as you hung up the phone. Taeyong stirred beside you, rolling onto his side. He was awake now and you weren’t sure how much of the conversation he’d heard. 
“Good morning,” he said, so casually, as if this was all normal to him. He leaned on his elbow, propping himself up to smile at you. 
“Uh, good morning,” you said, with a weak attempt at a smile. You were becoming hyper aware of the fact that you were naked, pulling the sheets over your bare breasts. “We need to talk about last night…”
“Okay,” he said, sitting up in the bed, eyebrows raised in curiosity. “What about last night?”
You took a deep breath, not quite sure what you were going to say. “Last night shouldn’t have happened. It was a mistake.”
Taeyong’s eyebrows furrowed in confusion. “What do you mean?”
“I have a boyfriend, Taeyong,” you said, not sure why you had to explain. “We shouldn’t have had sex.”
“You have a boyfriend, sure,” he said, “but you made your choice. We’re both adults.”
His words stung, a sharp reminder of the mess you had created. You hadn't intended to hurt Kun, but your actions had spoken louder than words.
"I know," you admitted, your voice barely a whisper. "I just... I don't know what I was thinking."
Taeyong sighed, his shoulders slumping in defeat. He reached out and gently cupped your face in his hands, his touch sending a jolt of electricity through your body. "I know, Y/N," he said, his voice soft and laced with understanding. He tilted your head toward his, looking you in your eyes. "But we can't go back now."
His words hung in the air, a reminder of the reality before you. You had crossed a line and there was no turning back. You hesitated, your mind torn between regret and desire. Taeyong leaned in closer, his lips not quite touching yours. You could feel his breath warm against your skin, sending shivers down your spine.
"Do you really think kissing me that day was a mistake?" he asked, his voice laced with longing. "I made love to you last night, Y/N…You’re telling me that was a mistake? You regret that?"
You stared into his eyes, your own filled with a rather strong cocktail of confusion, regret, and desire. You felt torn between the guilt of your actions and the connection you shared with Taeyong. Words didn’t come.
He wasn’t wrong. Last night, you made a choice - a choice that you would have to live with and figure out how to navigate. And choices had their consequences. 
You leaned into his touch and it wasn’t long before his lips met yours in a passionate kiss. You responded, your lips melting against his, your bodies pressing together, silently accepting the onward battle. The weight of your guilt and regret slowly melted away, replaced by these new feelings for Taeyong. In that moment, you were lost in Taeyong’s intoxicating embrace as you found yourself on top of him again, sinking onto his already-hard length.
*
Taeyong stepped out of your apartment building, the warm afternoon air washing over his face. He could still smell the lingering scent of your perfume on the collar of his shirt, along with the memory of your touch. With each step, he felt his heart ache in his chest. His emotions were all over the place and, after sleeping with you twice, they’d intensified. 
You made a choice and he had, too. The two of you made those choices together. He had no regrets. He replayed the events of the last night and this morning in his mind; your sweet moans and your tender touch, your whispers in his ear and his seed dripping from inside you.
A wave of longing washed over him. He craved your presence, your laughter, your touch, not just your body. He wanted more; he wanted to see you whenever he wanted, he wanted to touch you. He wished he could be the one you came home to, the one who you shared your hopes and dreams with and the one who wrapped his arms around you whenever you were upset. 
The connection he had with you was so intense, unlike anything he had ever felt before. But Taeyong couldn't help but feel a pang of sadness. He knew that your relationship was complicated and he was entangled with you, in a web of lies and hidden desires. The thought of sharing you with another man was a bitter pill to swallow, a jealousy that gnawed at his insides. But he had to keep his composure if he didn’t want to lose you, too.
After all, you weren’t his to have in the first place. 
*
As the hot water rippled down your body, you closed your eyes, trying to wash away the guilt that clung to you like a second skin. The memory of your actions with Taeyong haunted you, each droplet of water a constant reminder of the sins you had committed. You scrubbed your skin hard, as if you could erase the memory of Taeyong's touch. You longed for the cleansing power of water to somehow make you pure again, to wash away the stain of infidelity that marked your conscience.
The weight of guilt remained following a shower. Wrapped tightly in your towel, you moved through your apartment with a sense of urgency, cleaning and airing it out, trying to erase any and every trace of Taeyong's presence. You changed your sheets, replacing them with fresh, clean ones, hoping to remove the lingering scent of his cologne. You sprayed air freshener and opened the window, hoping to remove the smell of sex in the air. Every movement, every action, was fueled by a desperate need to erase the evidence of your wild night.
You took the Plan B that Taeyong went to get for you, chugging the pill down with water, as if that could undo things, as if it was a chance at redemption. The very last thing you needed was to end up pregnant and have no idea if the baby was Kun’s or Taeyong’s. You threw the empty box in the trash and took out the garbage, getting rid of the evidence. 
Not long after, the doorbell rang. You opened the door, revealing the man you’d betrayed with a container of soup. He kissed you on your lips on his way inside. “Hey babe. I thought about making you that Chinese soup you like but I was feeling a little lazy so I just bought you some chicken soup.”
You nodded with a weak smile. “Thank you…Were you up late working?”
“Yeah,” he said, placing the bag on the counter. He started sifting through the bags so that you could eat. “I went to sleep around two. What time did you get back?”
“Maybe around 12:30,” you answered, “I fell asleep earlier than I thought. I’m sorry I didn’t text you back.”
He shook his head. “No need to apologize. I know you were fine. Do you want to eat now?”
You nodded. Your energy levels were really low and, Kun being here when you were grinding on Taeyong’s dick a couple of hours ago, didn’t help the situation. As you ate, Kun carried the conversation. He talked about the housewarming last night and how nice Taeyong was and that he could see us getting along. He talked about how work went and how his juniors were slacking. You were only half there, hearing him and trying your best to look engaged.
"Is there anything else on your mind?" he asked gently, his hand reaching out to touch yours reassuringly.
Caught off guard by his question, you hesitated. Of course there was something else on your mind. You couldn’t stop thinking about Taeyong or what the two of you did. Of course, you couldn’t tell him any of it. "No, it's just the hangover," you repeated, as if trying to convince yourself of your own lie. “I think the food will help.”
Kun nodded slowly, seemingly accepting your explanation. “Wanna watch a movie? Sounds like the perfect lazy Sunday before we have to go to work tomorrow..”  
Work. That was the last place that you wanted to be. You’d have to confront reality somehow and face Taeyong in real life and real-time. Would things be awkward? Would Taeyong treat you differently? You didn’t take him for a man that would put you or his job at risk, but you weren’t sure how this would go. You’d opened up a door that couldn’t be shut so easily. 
It was your fault, truth be told. You weren’t perfect but, still, you couldn’t bring yourself to say that being with Taeyong was a mistake. You didn’t have any regrets when it came to him. You just regretted how it all came to be. You wished that this had happened at a time when you were single. Then, things would be okay, and these decisions didn’t have to weigh so heavily on your mind.
“Yeah,” you replied, taking away the empty containers. “Do you wanna pick this time?”
So, you tried to get back into normalcy by watching a movie with the man you were supposed to be in a relationship with. 
*
The next day at work, you found yourself glancing over at Taeyong every so often, a knot of guilt tightening in your stomach with each glance. His presence was a constant reminder of the sins you had committed, a secret that weighed heavily on your conscience.
Taeyong, on the other hand, seemed unfazed by the tension between you. He continued to greet you with his usual warm smile and engaging conversation, even going so far as to brush against your hands in passing moments. You tried to avoid his touch, to maintain a professional distance, but his subtle touches made you question whether or not you were overthinking. 
The workday dragged on, each minute dragging on as you sat with your conflicting emotions. You longed for the day to end, to escape your team, along with the weight of your guilt.
Finally, the clock struck five, signaling the end of your workday. As you gathered your belongings and headed out of the office, you picked up your phone to see a text from Taeyong.
Taeyong [5:01PM] : Can you meet me at Hidden Moon Bar?
He sent a link and it was a five minute walk from the office. You texted back, agreeing. Unfortunately, you couldn’t quite ignore Taeyong or pretend that what happened didn’t happen.
You said your goodbyes and left first. As you walked, you wondered how the conversation would go. All you knew was that this couldn’t continue. You had cheated on Kun, yes, but it would be better to stop now before things got out of control. You just needed to stand your ground and not get tempted to go back on what you wanted to say.
You sat down at the bar, deciding that you definitely needed a drink to have this conversation. A moment later, you had a glass of Pinot Noir in your hand. After a few gulps,  you felt much better about things. 
“Hey Y/N,” said a familiar voice from behind you. So casually, Taeyong took a seat on the barstool next to you. It wasn’t crowded, thankfully, as the happy hour crowds hadn’t made it just yet. “What are you drinking?”
"Hey," you said, your voice laced with a hint of nervousness. “I got Pinot Noir.”
Taeyong called over the bartender to say, “Can I have a glass of Pinot Noir, too?” He took out his wallet, pulling out his credit card. “You can put mine and hers on this card. Thanks!”
You nodded. ���Thanks.”
He said, “No problem. Well, anyway, we should talk about what happened, right?”
“Yeah, um, what we're doing, what we did…it's not right. We shouldn't be doing this, Taeyong. We're coworkers, and it's too complicated. I think you should date other people, seriously."
He looked at you, without saying a word. He didn’t say anything for a long time, to the point where you began to feel a little awkward. He sighed and took a sip of the wine the bartender had just placed in front of him. He took a long swig and put the glass down before turning back to you. "Y/N, dating other people isn't going to change how I feel about you. I can't just turn off these emotions. Trust me, I've tried, but it's not that easy."
You sighed, realizing the depth of the situation. "Taeyong, you deserve someone who can really be with you. Someone you don’t have to sneak around with. It's not fair to you."
He leaned back in the chair, studying your face. "You think I want just anyone? I want you, Y/N. And I understand it's complicated…”
You shook your head, feeling the weight of responsibility. "It's not just about us; it's about my boyfriend, our jobs, everything. I can't just throw it all away."
"I get it, Y/N. I do. But I can't deny what I feel. I can't just pretend that we didn’t kiss, that we didn’t have sex, that we’re just nothing.”
You said, "Taeyong, I care about you, but we can't keep going down this path. It's only going to get more complicated."
He leaned a little closer. "What if I don't want to date other people? What if I just want to be with you, even if it's complicated?"
You closed your eyes, feeling the weight of the situation. "Taeyong, we can’t…"
He sighed, a mixture of frustration and sadness in his expression. "I can't promise that my feelings will just disappear. But if you think it's the right thing to do and that this is what you want, I'll respect your decision."
*
The office clock ticked down to 5:00 PM, signaling the end of yet another busy week. As people began gathering their belongings and preparing to leave, Kevin turned to the group with a grin. "Hey, is anyone up for dinner tonight?" he asked, shutting his laptop. “I have no plans. Someone please say yes.”
A few heads nodded in agreement, while others declined, letting him know that they already had plans. Attention was on Taeyong now, as he hadn’t responded. 
"I can’t. I have a date tonight," Taeyong announced, in a light, casual tone.  
While your coworkers laughed and teased, a pang of jealousy coursed through your body. A date? Already? 
Hina, turning off her monitor, stood up from her chair. "Is this the first date?"
Taeyong nodded, his smile widening. "Yeah," he answered. "Seolyun gave me a suggestion for a steakhouse so I’m going to take her there. Supposed to be pretty good."
You recalled your recent conversation with Taeyong last week, where you had encouraged him to see other people. That meant that dates were a thing. You felt jealousy and regret, realizing you weren't as prepared for Taeyong to move on as you thought. The suggestion to date others had been a bit easier in theory than in practice. You did your best to hide your emotions, forcing a smile as you joined the others in wishing him a good time.
Kevin, always eager to add to the conversation, chimed in, "So, how did you meet her?"
"Online dating app," Taeyong replied casually. "We were texting for a while and I asked if she had any plans, so I figured why not take her out tonight?"
Seolyun, your curious coworker, couldn't resist the urge to pry. "Can we see a picture?" she asked, her eyebrows raised in anticipation.
Taeyong chuckled, "I'll show you if we end up dating," he teased. “I don’t wanna jinx it.”
The thought of Taeyong moving on and potentially having a new girlfriend stirred a mix of emotions within you. While you genuinely wished him the best, you couldn't deny the lingering feelings you still had for him.
As you gathered your things and prepared to leave the office, a wave of uncertainty washed over you. What was going to happen now? 
*
Taeyong found himself staring at his reflection in the mirror, conflicted emotions playing on his face. Tonight was the night of the date he agreed to. He’d be a liar if he said that he wasn’t nervous about it. He adjusted his collar, wondering if he was making the right decision. By going on a date, he was respecting your boundaries, right? 
The girl he was about to meet was pretty and she seemed genuinely nice. He didn’t know much about her yet, but he thought that maybe this could work out in his favor. But as he buttoned up his shirt, a nagging thought tugged at the edges of his mind – she wasn't you. And she never would be.
The conversation he had with you had been playing in his mind all week, like a broken record. Taeyong sighed, trying to come to terms with what you’d said. If you wanted him to see other people, he reasoned, it meant you didn't want him. He had to at least try to move on, to forget about the feelings he had for you. Yet, the mere thought of being with someone else made his heart ache.
Glancing at the clock, he realized it was time to leave. He locked eyes with his reflection, trying to give himself a pep talk. It’ll be fun, he thought, trying to reason with himself, an internal battle plaguing his heart. Just one date, he told himself. She seems to be a nice girl. Maybe we’ll hit it off.
There are more girls out there other than Y/N, Taeyong.
All of these thoughts crossed his mind but he wasn’t sure of himself. Maybe this date would be a step towards closure, a way to untangle himself from the feelings he had for you.
As he stepped out into the night, Taeyong couldn't shake the lingering doubt. Deep down, he couldn't escape the haunting question – was he truly ready to move on, or was this just a futile attempt to fill the void left by someone he couldn’t have?
*
The week had been long, filled with deadlines and endless meetings, so when Kevin suggested grabbing dinner and drinks to unwind, you decided to get on board. Spending time with friends seemed like a much better option than sulking at home and being trapped in wonderings about Taeyong and this mystery woman. 
As you all settled into a cozy corner booth, the clinking of glasses and the hum of conversation surrounded you. The menu was passed around, each person expressing their preferences and sharing recommendations.
Seolyun scanned the cocktail menu with enthusiasm. "I heard their mojitos are really good. Anyone up for one?”
Hina, sitting beside you, offered a thoughtful smile. "I'm game. Mojitos it is."
“Speaking of mojitos, me and my cousins are planning a trip to Cuba!”
Despite the lively conversation about mojitos and travel, your thoughts drifted to Taeyong yet again. Who was this girl? What did she look like? What was her personality like? Most importantly, would Taeyong like her? Would he like her so much that he ends up in a relationship with her? 
Every few minutes, you found yourself reaching for your phone to look at Taeyong’s Instagram profile. You'd refresh the page, hoping to catch a glimpse into his date, hoping to see a photo, a story, anything that would tell you where he was or what he was doing. 
“Any travel plans coming up for the summer, Y/N?” asked Kevin, as he put a few pieces of pork belly onto your plate. Now, you were being forced into the conversation. And rightfully so. 
“Nah, I wasn’t planning on going anywhere but I’m not going to lie, a beach trip would be amazing. Me and Hina were talking about maybe doing a weekend trip.”
“I haven’t been in years,” said Hina. 
“It’ll be nice to get some seafood,” you added. 
“Speaking of seafood,” chimed in Seolyun, “should we order squid to grill?”
As the night went on, you were almost filled to the brim with anxiety. No matter how good the food was or how strong your drink was, you could only think of Taeyong. The thought of him enjoying an evening out with a nameless, faceless woman filled your heart with frustration and envy. 
Every notification, every vibration, every sound made your heart drop. Everytime you got a notification, you hoped that it was him and you hoped that he was thinking about you as much as you were about him. But it never was, and that hurt more than you thought it would. 
As you were on the subway heading home, you realized that you basically only knew Taeyong as a friend. You hardly knew him as a lover, but you wanted to. Was he patient? Was he the type of man to give you random gifts, just because? Would he plan dates without you having to ask? Was he willing to work things out if you had a fight? You wondered what kind of man he’d be like, if you were dating.
A shower wasn’t much help either. Those thoughts didn’t disappear but they shifted to the memories of him being here with you. You thought of how hard he kissed you, how he grabbed your hands and held them down as he thrusted into you in missionary, and how deep inside you he was. It was almost as if Taeyong figured out your body and how to please you in just a night. You throbbed at the thought. 
You knew you had no right to feel this upset about it. You had Kun, your loving boyfriend who was on his way right now with a bottle of the Pinot Noir that you loved. And here you were thinking about a man that you couldn’t have. 
You’d invited him over before you got in the shower because you felt alone. You wanted what you couldn’t have, so you went with the next best option. It wasn’t that you didn’t love or care about Kun; you did. But Taeyong had shown you excitement that you hadn’t felt in a long time. Kun felt…safe. Taeyong felt dangerous. There was something about the thrill of it all that turned you on a little bit.
As you got out of the shower and wrapped your towel around you, you found yourself picking up your phone again. You clicked on the Instagram app for what was probably the hundredth time tonight and found that Taeyong had finally posted something — a story. You pressed your finger on Taeyong’s icon and found the photo that you’d been waiting for all night long. You held your finger down because ten seconds to view it wouldn’t be enough for you. Taeyong had taken a picture of a perfectly cooked steak, medium rare and glistening just how he liked it. The steak looked amazing, but what really caught your eye was the small bouquet of flowers across the table and the perfectly manicured hand you could see holding a steak knife in the top right corner. And to top it off, he put 5 star emojis with the location of the restaurant tagged.
You felt your eyes become hot with what you could only assume to be tears. You couldn’t help but chuckle at the irony, a cruel joke. Were you really upset with him when you were the one who told him to see other people? You couldn’t possibly keep up an affair with him. It was wrong and you both deserved better than to drag each other around on strings and making promises you couldn’t keep. You’d uttered those words at the time but you weren’t sure that you actually meant them. And here you were — jealous.
You heard the front door open and close, signaling your boyfriend’s arrival. Before you went out there, you needed to pull yourself together. You took a deep breath. Suddenly, you wished that you hadn’t asked for him to come over. But maybe it made sense now. Instead of being left alone with your thoughts, having company seemed like the better option.
“Babe?” he called from the kitchen.
You wiped your tears with your towel before you went out to greet him. “Hey, babe.”
Of course, he greeted you with a smile that made you feel guilty. As you got closer, he said, “You okay, Y/N? You look like you’ve been crying…”
You said, “I think it’s just my allergies.” A lie, but believable. 
As you wiped away what was left of your tears, he said, “Do you need some medicine? I can go get some if you need…”
You shook your head. “I’m okay,” you said, forcing a smile. “I’d love some of that wine though.”
“Oh yeah?” he asked, planting a kiss on your lips. 
“Yeah,” you said in a low, husky voice. You kissed him back, harder this time. Kun was surprised at your forwardness and pulled you closer to him. You could feel him getting hard and, sneakily, he made your towel fall to the floor. 
“I’ll pour some wine,” you said, pulling away from his embrace, and showing off your body. You could see him biting his lips as you reached into the cabinet for your wine glasses. His eyes never left you, even when he was across the room on the couch.
A moment later, you were walking toward him, wine glasses in hand to place on the side table. Then you disappeared into your bedroom and changed into the lingerie set he liked. Little did he know, he followed you and watched you as you changed. 
“You look good,” he said, coming up behind you. “Are you horny, babe?”
You turned around to face him, nodding. You were met with your wine glass. You took it from him and took a long swig of the red wine. A little bit dripped down your chin as you pulled the glass away and Kun was quick to wipe it away with his thumb, slowly.
You took another sip and you watched him over the top of your glass. After you put the glass on top of your dresser, Kun pulled you close to him, pressing your body against his. You said, “So are you going to do something about it?”
You bit your lip. “Maybe…” Reaching down for his pants, you pulled them down. He was left in his boxers, his hardness poking through to give you a nice view. You heard a small groan come from his lips as you pulled those off, too, freeing him from the constraints. You ran your fingers back and forth across the head of his penis, teasing him, and watched it jump each time. You got down on your knees and took him in your mouth. You sucked his dick, nice and slow, at first. Then, you picked up the speed, drawing louder moans from your boyfriend. He put his hand on your shoulder and you knew that if you kept going he’d cum before you could get him inside you.
You pushed him back onto the bed, to his surprise, and climbed on top of him. “Take this off,” you said, referring to his shirt. You quickly helped him with the buttons and tossed the shirt to the side. He sat up and latched onto your nipple; he had easy access thanks to the lingerie, which had a small hole designated for them. He licked and nibbled on them. You screwed your eyes shut in pleasure, letting out small moans. Then, he reached down to your slit, running his fingers across it. You could tell that you were wet, partially because of the stimulation and partially because you thought of what it felt like when Taeyong touched you. 
He said, “Are you ready?”
You nodded. “Fuck me, Kun.”
With that, he flipped you over onto your back. He slipped in easily and started thrusting into you right away. Your walls gripped at him tightly, making him groan. With each stroke, you could hear how wet your pussy was from that wet, squishy sound. Hearing it must’ve made him excited because he was suddenly fucking you harder, faster; it was hard to catch your breath with the feeling of your body being pounded into the mattress. 
He buried his neck into yours as he thrusted in and out of him. From the way his breathing got heavier and heavier, you could tell he was close. The thought got you so excited. 
“Ride it, babe,” he said, pulling out. 
No words were exchanged. You just sunk down onto him with a squish. He groaned in response and let you take control. You started grinding on his dick, back and forth. Your wetness began soaking his pelvis and his lips parted in pleasure.
“That’s my good girl,” he said. “There you go.”
Hearing his voice made you throb even harder. You started going faster. It wouldn’t be long until you rode yourself into an orgasm. It wasn’t often that you found yourself having vaginal orgasms but today was the day. You could almost taste that delicious feeling building up inside you.  
In the moment of your orgasm, you got lost in the movement of your hips. You allowed yourself to forget. You forgot about the guilt and the lies. You lost yourself in the feeling of Kun’s fingers digging into your hips instead. 
But even as you came, a part of you couldn’t help but wonder, in the back of your mind, where Taeyong was, who he was with, and if he was thinking of you, even just a little.
But this was safe. Being here with Kun was safe. 
*
Taeyong tossed and turned in bed that night, not able to get much quality sleep. He’d dozed off here and there, but it’d been nothing substantial. You crept into his dreams again and things were perfect. It was as if he was living in an alternate universe, one where you were single and being right or wrong didn’t matter. In the dream, you were his and he was yours. He could almost smell the scent of your perfume, almost feel your lips on his. It was a dream he didn’t want to wake up from.
Despite the content of his dreams, he had a good time on the date. Her name was Hyewol. He started the night off in the same way he would’ve wanted to with you, if he had the opportunity. He met up with her, greeting her with a small bouquet of roses. Then they walked to the restaurant together and got to know one another on the way to the restaurant. They told each other the basics: where they were from and where they worked, what schools they went to and what countries they visited, and their favorite things. Then, they enjoyed steak and wine for dinner. 
He let her know that he’d like to take her on another date and, luckily for him, she was all for it. Part of him believed that maybe he could date her, that he could move on. But the truth was that she wasn’t you. So far, she was a person he could see himself with, but that wasn’t enough. Their chemistry wasn’t as strong. He could tell just by the way that he was in no hurry to kiss her.
He’d spent the past week on dating apps, hoping that the void he felt in his heart would be filled. He’d swiped through profiles, messaged other women, and he even went on a date tonight. The problem remained and it was that you couldn’t be replaced.
It was a bit dramatic, he supposed, but he felt as though he couldn’t just be friends with you. The two of you had crossed a line and it was too late to turn back now. The damage had already been done, hadn’t it? What if he just pushed forward anyway? No, he thought. He had to respect your boundaries. He couldn’t just tell you no. So he needed to figure out if you were serious about him moving on. But for now, he’d give it some time first. Maybe you’d change your mind and come to him instead.
General Taglist: @to-all-the-stories-i-love @sweetnspicy-noona
Lost for Words Taglist: @ridinjuyeon @soonyoonswoo
26 notes · View notes
neowinestainedress · 1 year
Text
Tumblr media
© neowinestaindress; all rights reserved. do NOT repost, modify, or translate any work from this blog on any other platform and claim it as yours. you can find my works on ao3 (neowinestaindress) and wattpad (winestaintedress_; currently inactive).
Tumblr media
LONG FICS
into the woods ; 11k — inferno event | werewolves (feat johnny, jaehyun, jeno, yangyang) [s]  — ‘don’t go in the woods, past the first two rows of trees.’ It’s a simple rule, planted in every kid’s mind in the village since they are born. Nobody knows why, but nobody dares to question why. But pride leads to do dangerous things and what’s supposed to be a silly bet to prove something, gets you lost a bit too far into the scary forest. And those who seem to be polite strangers turn out to be something they’re not.
do you want to play a game, detective? ; 10k — ghostface/scream!au [s] — in these past months your only goal is to find the killer that is terrorizing the town of Woodsboro, but when you get close to him and feel like you finally have the upper hand, Ghostface turns the game around again. Or, Ghostface wants to play with you but not like he does with his victims, and you let him.
Tumblr media
SERIES
₊‧.°.⋆˚₊‧⋆. fireplace ashes ₊‧.°.⋆˚₊‧⋆.
Tumblr media
DRABBLES
₊‧.°.⋆˚₊‧⋆. fireplace ashes ₊‧.°.⋆˚₊‧⋆.
Tumblr media
BLURBS / HARD HOURS
₊‧.°.⋆˚₊‧⋆. fireplace ashes ₊‧.°.⋆˚₊‧⋆.
Tumblr media
4 notes · View notes
fly-forever-young · 2 years
Text
•~𝐊𝐮𝐧
Tumblr media
Masterlist Navigation
•One Shot:
Nothing yet..
•Timestamps:
Nothing yet...
3 notes · View notes
amanitacurses · 3 months
Text
Tumblr media
491 notes · View notes
azurexxstrawberries · 6 months
Text
TBHK men getting nightmares about s/o
how i think tbhk men would react to having nightmares about their s/o!
established relationship, fluff(?), headcannons
My Masterlists
Tumblr media
Hanako
(do ghosts even sleep in the first place? ...let's just pretend they do for a sec)
he had a dream, where you left him for being a murderer.
he desperately begged for you to come back, clutching onto your clothes, tears welled up in his eyes.
but you just turned away, and continued walking.
he woke up, a cracked cry leaving his throat.
he realized it was a dream pretty quickly, but it still felt so real in that moment.
feeling a faint resemblance of a heart beating hard in his chest, he went looking for you, making sure that what he saw in his nightmare wasn't real.
he finds you curled up underneath a bundle of blankets in your bed.
he puts his cold fingers on your face, making sure that it was actually you, right there, in that moment.
...
you woke up in the morning, feeling a heavy weight on your arm.
hanako had been clinging onto you for the past few hours, making sure you didn't escape from his grasp.
he had a small put on his face, and seeing that you woke up, he pulled you closer to him and pout his face in your chest, blushing slightly.
"Thank you for being with me."
Kou Minamoto
kou had a dream where you had died from a supernatural because he wasn't strong enough to protect you.
he watched you being torn, screaming, because of his incompetence.
he shot straight upright in his bed, and after recognizing the familiar surroundings, he lowered himself back into the comfort of his blankets.
bundled up, he tossed and turned in the sheets for a while, heart racing out of his chest.
poor guy had the whole scene replaying in his mind over and over again :(
after the heavy feeling in his chest got too much for him to bear, he got out of bed and walked to the kitchen to drink a glass of water to cool him down.
kou would probably have too much pride to show up at your door about a nightmare.
so he just sat down at his couch, scrolling through the tv trying to find something to help him wind down.
oh, but he would definitely stick to you aalllllllllllll day during school.
"You wouldn't die on me, right?"
Sousuke Mitsuba
his dream was about his death. everything, from the beginning to the end. the excruciating pain, to the heartbreak of seeing his mom kneeling over his hospital bed.
and then there was you.
his only ever friend.
and slowly, you forgot about him.
you went on about life, as if he had never existed.
and that hurt more than being run over 1000 times with a car.
he slowly blinked himself awake, bringing his trembling hands to his face to wipe the tears out of his eyes.
looking forward, he saw you under the delicate moonlight, sleeping soundly.
he caressed your cheek, feeling more tears well up in his eyes, thinking about the fact that you would stay with him, even with all his imperfections.
the fact that he could be himself around you.
the fact that you chose him over anyone else.
...
you slowly woke up to the sound of faint crying.
mitsuba, seeing that you had woken up, began crying even harder, embarrassed.
the rest of the night was spent with him in your arms as you stroked his hair gently, offering words of encouragement.
"I'd miss you if you died."
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA THANK YOU FOR READING!!! i hope you enjoyed it! im not really experienced, so feedback is appreciated! im not really experienced with writing for tumblr, so i hope this turned out ok! i learned most of my stuff from reading other posts lol id be forever grateful if you left a like!! id be really happy to know someone enjoyed my work :3
438 notes · View notes